local-alloc.c (requires_inout): Don't use reserved range for EXTRA_CONSTRAINTS...
[gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,1989,1992,1993,1994,1995,1996,1997,1998,1999,2000
2 @c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
4 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
5
6 @node Target Macros
7 @chapter Target Description Macros
8 @cindex machine description macros
9 @cindex target description macros
10 @cindex macros, target description
11 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
12
13 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
14 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
15 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
16 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
17 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
18 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
19 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
20 @file{config.h}.
21
22 @menu
23 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
24 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
25 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
26 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
27 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
28 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
29 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
30 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
31 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
32 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
33 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
34 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
35 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
36 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
37 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
38 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
39 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
40 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
41 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
42 * Misc:: Everything else.
43 @end menu
44
45 @node Driver
46 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
47 @cindex driver
48 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
49
50 @c prevent bad page break with this line
51 You can control the compilation driver.
52
53 @table @code
54 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
55 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
56 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
57 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
58 option takes--zero, for many options.
59
60 By default, this macro is defined as
61 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
62 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
63 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
64 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
65 additional options.
66
67 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
68 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
69 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
70 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
71 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
72 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
73
74 By default, this macro is defined as
75 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
76 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
77 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
78 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
79 additional options.
80
81 @findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
82 @item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
83 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
84 stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
85 boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
86 generated, zero otherwise.
87
88 By default, this macro is defined as
89 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
90 options properly. You need not define
91 @code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
92 options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
93 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
94 for additional options.
95
96 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
97 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
98 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
99 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
100
101 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
102
103 @findex CPP_SPEC
104 @item CPP_SPEC
105 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
106 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
107 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP.
108
109 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
110
111 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
112 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
113 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
114 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
115 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
116
117 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
118 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
119 be defined.
120
121 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
122 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
123 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
124 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
125 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
126
127 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
128 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
129 be defined.
130
131 @findex NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
132 @item NO_BUILTIN_WCHAR_TYPE
133 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
134 @code{__WCHAR_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__WCHAR_TYPE__} must then be
135 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
136
137 This should be defined if @code{WCHAR_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
138 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
139 be defined.
140
141 @findex NO_BUILTIN_WINT_TYPE
142 @item NO_BUILTIN_WINT_TYPE
143 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
144 @code{__WINT_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__WINT_TYPE__} must then be
145 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
146
147 This should be defined if @code{WINT_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
148 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
149 be defined.
150
151 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
152 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
153 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
154 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
155 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
156 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
157
158 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
159 definition.
160
161 @findex CC1_SPEC
162 @item CC1_SPEC
163 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
164 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
165 front ends.
166 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
167 for GCC to pass to front ends..
168
169 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
170
171 @findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
172 @item CC1PLUS_SPEC
173 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
174 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
175 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
176
177 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
178 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
179 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
180 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC.
181
182 @findex ASM_SPEC
183 @item ASM_SPEC
184 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
185 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
186 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
187 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
188
189 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
190
191 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
192 @item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
193 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
194 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
195 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
196 an example of this.
197
198 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
199
200 @findex LINK_SPEC
201 @item LINK_SPEC
202 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
203 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
204 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
205
206 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
207
208 @findex LIB_SPEC
209 @item LIB_SPEC
210 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
211 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
212 command given to the linker.
213
214 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
215 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
216
217 @findex LIBGCC_SPEC
218 @item LIBGCC_SPEC
219 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
220 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
221 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
222 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
223
224 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
225 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
226 option is specified.
227
228 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
229 @item STARTFILE_SPEC
230 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
231 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
232 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
233
234 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
235 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
236
237 @findex ENDFILE_SPEC
238 @item ENDFILE_SPEC
239 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
240 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
241 the very end of the command given to the linker.
242
243 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
244
245 @findex EXTRA_SPECS
246 @item EXTRA_SPECS
247 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
248 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
249 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
250
251 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
252 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
253 string constant that provides the specification.
254
255 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
256
257 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
258 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
259 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
260 these definitions.
261
262 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
263 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
264 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
265 used.
266
267 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
268
269 @example
270 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
271 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
272
273 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
274 @end example
275
276 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
277 @smallexample
278 #undef CPP_SPEC
279 #define CPP_SPEC \
280 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
281 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
282 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
283 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
284
285 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
286 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
287 @end smallexample
288
289 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
290 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
291
292 @smallexample
293 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
294 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
295 @end smallexample
296
297 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
298 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
299 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
300 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
301 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
302 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
303 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
304
305 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
306 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
307 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
308 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
309 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
310 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
311 not affect @samp{-L} options.
312
313 @findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
314 @item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
315 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
316 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
317 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
318 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
319 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
320 the effect you need.
321
322 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
323 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
324 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
325 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
326 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
327 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
328
329 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
330 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
331 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
332 @xref{Target Fragment}.
333
334 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
335 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
336 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
337 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
338 indicates an absolute file name.
339
340 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
341 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
342 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
343 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
344 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
345
346 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
347 @item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
348 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
349 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
350 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
351 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
352 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
353
354 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
355 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
356 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
357 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
358 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
359
360 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
361 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
362 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
363 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
364 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
365 compiler.
366
367 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
368 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
369 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
370 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
371 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
372
373 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
374 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
375 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
376 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
377 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
378 initialize the necessary environment variables.
379
380 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
381 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
382 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
383 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
384 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
385 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
386
387 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
388 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
389
390 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
391 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
392 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
393 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
394 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
395 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
396
397 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
398 specified.
399
400 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
401 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
402 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
403 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
404 try when searching for header files.
405
406 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
407 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
408
409 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
410 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
411 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
412 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
413 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
414
415 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
416 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
417 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
418 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
419 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
420 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
421 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
422 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
423 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
424 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
425
426 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
427 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
428 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
429 for C++-only directories,
430 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
431 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
432 the array with a null element.
433
434 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
435 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
436 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
437 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
438
439 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
440
441 @example
442 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
443 @{ \
444 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
445 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
446 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
447 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
448 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
449 @}
450 @end example
451 @end table
452
453 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
454
455 @enumerate
456 @item
457 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
458
459 @item
460 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
461
462 @item
463 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
464
465 @item
466 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
467
468 @item
469 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
470
471 @item
472 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
473 @end enumerate
474
475 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
476
477 @enumerate
478 @item
479 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
480
481 @item
482 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
483
484 @item
485 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
486 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
487
488 @item
489 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
490
491 @item
492 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
493
494 @item
495 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
496
497 @item
498 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
499
500 @item
501 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
502
503 @item
504 @file{/lib/}.
505
506 @item
507 @file{/usr/lib/}.
508 @end enumerate
509
510 @node Run-time Target
511 @section Run-time Target Specification
512 @cindex run-time target specification
513 @cindex predefined macros
514 @cindex target specifications
515
516 @c prevent bad page break with this line
517 Here are run-time target specifications.
518
519 @table @code
520 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
521 @item CPP_PREDEFINES
522 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
523 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
524 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
525 specified.
526
527 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
528 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
529 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
530 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
531
532 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
533
534 @smallexample
535 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
536 @end smallexample
537
538 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
539 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
540 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
541
542 @findex extern int target_flags
543 @item extern int target_flags;
544 This declaration should be present.
545
546 @cindex optional hardware or system features
547 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
548 @item TARGET_@dots{}
549 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
550 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
551 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
552 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
553 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
554 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
555 @code{target_flags}.
556
557 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
558 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}. It is
559 recommended that a helper macro @code{TARGET_MASK_@var{featurename}}
560 is defined for each bit-value to test, and used in
561 @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} and @code{TARGET_SWITCHES}. For
562 example:
563
564 @smallexample
565 #define TARGET_MASK_68020 1
566 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & TARGET_MASK_68020)
567 @end smallexample
568
569 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
570 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
571 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
572 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
573 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
574
575 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
576 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
577 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
578 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
579 with a subgrouping for each command option.
580
581 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
582 name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
583 @code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
584 displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
585 by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
586 string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
587 for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
588 actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
589
590 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
591 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
592 target options act starting with that value.
593
594 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
595 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
596
597 @smallexample
598 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
599 @{ @{ "68020", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}, \
600 @{ "68000", -TARGET_MASK_68020, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
601 @{ "", TARGET_MASK_68020, "" @}@}
602 @end smallexample
603
604 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
605 @item TARGET_OPTIONS
606 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
607 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
608 subgrouping for each command option.
609
610 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
611 of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
612 The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
613 given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
614 by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
615
616 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
617 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
618 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
619
620 @smallexample
621 extern char *m88k_short_data;
622 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
623 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
624 @end smallexample
625
626 @findex TARGET_VERSION
627 @item TARGET_VERSION
628 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
629 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
630 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
631
632 @smallexample
633 #ifdef MOTOROLA
634 #define TARGET_VERSION \
635 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
636 #else
637 #define TARGET_VERSION \
638 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
639 #endif
640 @end smallexample
641
642 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
643 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
644 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
645 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
646 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
647 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
648 parsed.
649
650 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
651 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
652
653 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
654 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
655 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
656 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
657 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
658 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
659 used as the default values for the other command line options.
660
661 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
662 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
663
664 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
665
666 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
667 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
668 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
669 machine-specific optimizations.
670
671 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
672 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
673 generated code.
674
675 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
676 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
677 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
678 pointer. If this macro is defined, GCC will turn on the
679 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
680 @end table
681
682 @node Storage Layout
683 @section Storage Layout
684 @cindex storage layout
685
686 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
687 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
688 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
689 @xref{Run-time Target}.
690
691 @table @code
692 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
693 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
694 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
695 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
696 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
697 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
698 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
699 macro need not be a constant.
700
701 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
702 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
703
704 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
705 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
706 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
707 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
708
709 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
710 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
711 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
712 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
713 memory locations and registers; GCC fundamentally assumes that the
714 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
715 macro need not be a constant.
716
717 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
718 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
719 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
720 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
721 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
722 based on preprocessor defines.
723
724 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
725 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
726 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
727 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
728 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
729 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
730
731 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
732 multi-word integers.
733
734 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
735 @item BITS_PER_UNIT
736 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
737 unit (byte); normally 8.
738
739 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
740 @item BITS_PER_WORD
741 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
742
743 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
744 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
745 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
746 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
747 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
748
749 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
750 @item UNITS_PER_WORD
751 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
752
753 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
754 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
755 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
756 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
757 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
758
759 @findex POINTER_SIZE
760 @item POINTER_SIZE
761 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
762 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
763 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
764
765 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
766 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
767 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
768 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
769 be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
770
771 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
772 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
773
774 @findex PROMOTE_MODE
775 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
776 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
777 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
778 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
779 scalar type.
780
781 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
782 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
783 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
784 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
785 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
786 counterparts.
787
788 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
789 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
790 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
791 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
792 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
793 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
794
795 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
796
797 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
798 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
799 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
800 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
801
802 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
803 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
804 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
805 should also be done for the return value of functions.
806
807 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
808 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
809
810 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
811 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
812 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
813 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
814 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
815 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
816
817 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
818 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
819 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
820 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
821 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
822 size of an integer.
823
824 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
825 @item STACK_BOUNDARY
826 Define this macro if there is a guaranteed alignment for the stack
827 pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression
828 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a
829 default if PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY is not defined.
830
831 @findex PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
832 @item PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
833 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
834 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
835 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). If STACK_BOUNDARY is
836 also defined, this macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger
837 than STACK_BOUNDARY.
838
839 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}
840 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
841 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies
842 a less strict alignment than @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may
843 be momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
844
845 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
846 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
847 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
848
849 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
850 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
851 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
852
853 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
854 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
855 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
856 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
857 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
858 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
859
860 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
861 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
862 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
863 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
864 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
865 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
866
867 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
868 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
869 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
870 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GCC uses
871 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
872 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
873
874 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
875 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
876 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
877 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
878 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
879 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
880
881 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
882 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
883 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
884 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
885 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
886 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
887
888 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
889
890 @findex strcpy
891 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
892 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
893 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
894 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
895
896 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
897 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
898 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
899 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
900 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
901 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
902 align the object.
903
904 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
905
906 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
907 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
908 constants can be done inline.
909
910 @findex LOCAL_ALIGNMENT
911 @item LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
912 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
913 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
914 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
915 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
916
917 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
918
919 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
920 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
921
922 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
923 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
924 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
925 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
926
927 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
928 that results from an empty field.
929
930 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
931 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
932 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
933 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
934
935 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
936 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
937
938 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
939 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
940 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
941 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
942 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
943
944 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
945 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
946 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
947 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
948
949 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
950 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
951 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
952 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
953 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
954 boundary for it.
955
956 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
957 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
958 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
959 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
960
961 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
962 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
963
964 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
965 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
966 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
967 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
968
969 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
970 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
971 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
972
973 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
974 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
975 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
976
977 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
978 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
979 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
980
981 @example
982 struct foo1
983 @{
984 char x;
985 char :0;
986 char y;
987 @};
988
989 struct foo2
990 @{
991 char x;
992 int :0;
993 char y;
994 @};
995
996 main ()
997 @{
998 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
999 sizeof (struct foo1));
1000 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1001 sizeof (struct foo2));
1002 exit (0);
1003 @}
1004 @end example
1005
1006 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1007 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1008
1009 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1010 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1011 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
1012 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
1013
1014 @findex STRUCT_FORCE_BLK
1015 @item STRUCT_FORCE_BLK (@var{field})
1016 Return 1 if a structure containing @var{field} should be accessed using
1017 @code{BLKMODE}.
1018
1019 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{c4x.h} for an example
1020 of how to use this macro to prevent a structure having a floating point
1021 field from being accessed in an integer mode.
1022
1023 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
1024 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1025 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a type
1026 (given by @var{type} as a tree node) when the size computed in the
1027 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment is @var{specified}.
1028
1029 The default is to round @var{computed} up to a multiple of @var{specified}.
1030
1031 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT
1032 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE_UNIT (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1033 Similar to @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE}, but sizes and alignments are
1034 specified in units (bytes). If you define @code{ROUND_TYPE_SIZE},
1035 you must also define this macro and they must be defined consistently
1036 with each other.
1037
1038 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
1039 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1040 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1041 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1042 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1043 @var{specified}.
1044
1045 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1046 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1047
1048 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1049 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1050 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1051 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1052 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1053 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1054 (DImode)} is assumed.
1055
1056 @findex VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
1057 @item VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P(@var{mode})
1058 Define this macro to be nonzero if the port is prepared to handle insns
1059 involving vector mode @var{mode}. At the very least, it must have move
1060 patterns for this mode.
1061
1062 @findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
1063 @item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1064 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1065 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1066 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1067 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1068 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1069 having its mode specified.
1070
1071 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1072 would most commonly define this macro if the
1073 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1074 64-bit mode.
1075
1076 @findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1077 @item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1078 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1079 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1080 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1081
1082 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1083 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1084 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1085
1086 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1087 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1088 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1089 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1090 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1091 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1092 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1093 the value is already known to be out of range.
1094
1095 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1096 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1097 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1098 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1099
1100 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1101
1102 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1103 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1104 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1105 There are three defined values:
1106
1107 @table @code
1108 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1109 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1110 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1111 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1112
1113 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1114 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1115 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1116
1117 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1118 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1119 This code indicates any other format.
1120 @end table
1121
1122 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1123 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1124 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1125 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1126
1127 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1128 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1129 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1130
1131 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1132 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1133 GCC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1134 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1135 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1136 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GCC uses the traditional
1137 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1138 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1139 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1140 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1141 If you are writing a new port, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1142
1143 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1144 @end table
1145
1146 @node Type Layout
1147 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1148
1149 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1150 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1151 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1152 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1153
1154 @table @code
1155 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1156 @item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1157 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1158 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1159
1160 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1161 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1162 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1163 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1164 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1165 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1166
1167 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1168 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1169 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1170 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1171 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1172 unit.)
1173
1174 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1175 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1176 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1177 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1178
1179 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1180 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1181 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1182 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1183 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1184 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1185 used in @code{cpp}.
1186
1187 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1188 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1189 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1190 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1191 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1192 macro must be at least 64.
1193
1194 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1195 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1196 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1197 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1198 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1199
1200 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1201 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1202 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1203 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1204 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1205 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1206 used in @code{cpp}.
1207
1208 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1209 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1210 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1211 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1212
1213 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1214 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1215 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1216 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1217 words.
1218
1219 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1220 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1221 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1222 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1223 words.
1224
1225 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1226 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1227 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1228 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1229 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1230 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1231 is the default.
1232
1233 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1234 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1235 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1236 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1237 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1238 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1239
1240 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1241 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1242 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1243 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1244 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1245 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1246
1247 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1248
1249 @findex SIZE_TYPE
1250 @item SIZE_TYPE
1251 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1252 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1253 contents of the string.
1254
1255 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1256 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1257 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1258 of the data type names defined in the function
1259 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1260 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1261 crash on startup.
1262
1263 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1264 int"}.
1265
1266 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1267 @item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1268 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1269 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1270 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1271 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1272
1273 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1274
1275 @findex WCHAR_TYPE
1276 @item WCHAR_TYPE
1277 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1278 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1279 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1280 information.
1281
1282 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1283
1284 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1285 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1286 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1287 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1288 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1289
1290 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1291 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1292 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1293 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1294 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1295 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1296 used in @code{cpp}.
1297
1298 @findex WINT_TYPE
1299 @item WINT_TYPE
1300 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1301 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1302 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1303 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1304 information.
1305
1306 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1307
1308 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1309 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1310 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1311 @code{int}.
1312
1313 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1314 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1315
1316 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1317 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1318 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1319 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1320 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1321 label.
1322
1323 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1324 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1325
1326 @findex TARGET_BELL
1327 @item TARGET_BELL
1328 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1329 @samp{\a}.
1330
1331 @findex TARGET_TAB
1332 @findex TARGET_BS
1333 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1334 @item TARGET_BS
1335 @itemx TARGET_TAB
1336 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1337 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1338 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1339
1340 @findex TARGET_VT
1341 @findex TARGET_FF
1342 @findex TARGET_CR
1343 @item TARGET_VT
1344 @itemx TARGET_FF
1345 @itemx TARGET_CR
1346 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1347 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1348 @end table
1349
1350 @node Registers
1351 @section Register Usage
1352 @cindex register usage
1353
1354 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1355 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1356
1357 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1358 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1359 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1360 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1361 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1362
1363 @menu
1364 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1365 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1366 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1367 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1368 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1369 @end menu
1370
1371 @node Register Basics
1372 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1373
1374 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1375 Registers have various characteristics.
1376
1377 @table @code
1378 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1379 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1380 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1381 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1382 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1383 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1384
1385 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1386 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1387 @cindex fixed register
1388 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1389 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1390 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1391 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1392 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1393 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1394 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1395
1396 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1397 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1398 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1399
1400 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1401 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1402 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1403 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1404 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1405
1406 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1407 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1408 @cindex call-used register
1409 @cindex call-clobbered register
1410 @cindex call-saved register
1411 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1412 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1413 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1414 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1415 function calls.
1416
1417 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1418 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1419 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1420
1421 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1422 @item HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1423 @cindex call-used register
1424 @cindex call-clobbered register
1425 @cindex call-saved register
1426 A C expression that is non-zero if it is not permissible to store a
1427 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1428 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1429 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1430 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1431
1432 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1433 @findex fixed_regs
1434 @findex call_used_regs
1435 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1436 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify five variables
1437 @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs},
1438 (these three are of type @code{char []}), @code{reg_names} (of type
1439 @code{const char * []}) and @code{reg_class_contents} (of type
1440 @code{HARD_REG_SET}).
1441 Before the macro is called @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}
1442 @code{reg_class_contents} and @code{reg_names} have been initialized
1443 from @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS},
1444 @code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS} and @code{REGISTER_NAMES}, respectively,
1445 @code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1446 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}} command
1447 options have been applied.
1448
1449 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1450 on target flags.
1451
1452 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1453
1454 @cindex disabling certain registers
1455 @cindex controlling register usage
1456 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1457 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1458 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1459 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1460 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1461 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1462
1463 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1464 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1465 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1466 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1467
1468 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1469 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1470 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1471 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1472 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1473 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1474 @code{setjmp}.
1475
1476 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1477 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1478 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1479 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1480 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1481 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1482 outbound register.
1483
1484 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1485 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1486 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1487 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1488 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1489 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1490 register.
1491
1492 @findex LOCAL_REGNO
1493 @item LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1494 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1495 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1496 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1497 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1498 gotos.
1499
1500 @ignore
1501 @findex PC_REGNUM
1502 @item PC_REGNUM
1503 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1504 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1505 @end ignore
1506 @end table
1507
1508 @node Allocation Order
1509 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1510 @cindex order of register allocation
1511 @cindex register allocation order
1512
1513 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1514 Registers are allocated in order.
1515
1516 @table @code
1517 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1518 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1519 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1520 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1521 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1522
1523 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1524 (all else being equal).
1525
1526 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1527 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1528 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1529 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1530 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1531
1532 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1533 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1534 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1535 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1536
1537 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1538 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1539 register; and so on.
1540
1541 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1542 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1543
1544 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1545 @end table
1546
1547 @node Values in Registers
1548 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1549
1550 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1551 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1552 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1553
1554 @table @code
1555 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1556 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1557 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1558 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1559 @var{mode}.
1560
1561 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1562 definition of this macro is
1563
1564 @smallexample
1565 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1566 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1567 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1568 @end smallexample
1569
1570 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1571 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1572 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1573
1574 @smallexample
1575 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1576 @end smallexample
1577
1578 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1579 registers, like Sparc v9.
1580
1581 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1582 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1583 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1584 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1585 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1586 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1587
1588 @smallexample
1589 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1590 @end smallexample
1591
1592 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1593 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1594
1595 @cindex register pairs
1596 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1597 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1598 odd register numbers for such modes.
1599
1600 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1601 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1602 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1603 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1604
1605 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1606 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1607 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1608 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1609 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1610 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1611 to be tieable.
1612
1613 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1614 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1615 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1616 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1617 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1618 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1619
1620 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1621 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1622 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1623 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1624 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1625 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1626 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1627 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1628 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1629
1630 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1631 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1632 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1633 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1634 constraints for those instructions.
1635
1636 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1637 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1638 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1639 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1640 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1641
1642 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1643 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1644 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1645 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1646
1647 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1648 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1649 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1650 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1651 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1652 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1653
1654 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1655 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1656 allocation.
1657
1658 @findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1659 @item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1660 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1661 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1662 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1663 @end table
1664
1665 @node Leaf Functions
1666 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1667
1668 @cindex leaf functions
1669 @cindex functions, leaf
1670 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1671 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1672 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1673 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1674 normally arrive.
1675
1676 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1677 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1678 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1679 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1680 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1681 functions''.
1682
1683 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1684 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1685 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1686 accomplish this.
1687
1688 @table @code
1689 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1690 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1691 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1692 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1693 function treatment.
1694
1695 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1696 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1697 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1698 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1699 in this vector.
1700
1701 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1702 the treatment of leaf functions.
1703
1704 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1705 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1706 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1707 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1708
1709 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1710 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1711 will cause the compiler to abort.
1712
1713 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1714 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1715 this.
1716 @end table
1717
1718 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1719 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1720 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1721 treat leaf functions specially. They can test the C variable
1722 @code{current_function_is_leaf} which is nonzero for leaf functions.
1723 @code{current_function_is_leaf} is set prior to local register allocation
1724 and is valid for the remaining compiler passes. They can also test the C
1725 variable @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for
1726 leaf functions which only use leaf registers.
1727 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after reload and is
1728 only useful if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1729 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1730 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1731
1732 @node Stack Registers
1733 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1734
1735 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1736 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1737 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1738 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1739
1740 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1741 they must be consecutively numbered.
1742
1743 @table @code
1744 @findex STACK_REGS
1745 @item STACK_REGS
1746 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1747
1748 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1749 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1750 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1751 of the stack.
1752
1753 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1754 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1755 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1756 the stack.
1757 @end table
1758
1759 @node Register Classes
1760 @section Register Classes
1761 @cindex register class definitions
1762 @cindex class definitions, register
1763
1764 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1765 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1766 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1767 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1768
1769 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1770 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1771 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1772
1773 @findex ALL_REGS
1774 @findex NO_REGS
1775 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1776 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1777 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1778 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1779
1780 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1781 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1782 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1783 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1784 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1785 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1786
1787 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1788 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1789
1790 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1791 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1792 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1793 them in operand constraints.
1794
1795 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1796 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1797 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1798 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1799 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1800
1801 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1802 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1803 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1804 in their union.
1805
1806 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1807 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1808 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1809 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1810 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1811
1812 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1813 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1814 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1815 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1816 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1817 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1818 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1819 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1820 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1821
1822 @table @code
1823 @findex enum reg_class
1824 @item enum reg_class
1825 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1826 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1827 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1828 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1829 tells how many classes there are.
1830
1831 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1832 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1833 in many of the tables described below.
1834
1835 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1836 @item N_REG_CLASSES
1837 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1838
1839 @example
1840 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1841 @end example
1842
1843 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1844 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1845 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1846 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1847
1848 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1849 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1850 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1851 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1852 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1853 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1854
1855 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1856 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1857 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1858 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1859 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
1860 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
1861 so on.
1862
1863 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1864 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1865 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1866 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1867 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1868 register.
1869
1870 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1871 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1872 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1873 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1874 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1875
1876 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1877 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1878 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1879 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1880 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1881 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1882
1883 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1884 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1885 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1886 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1887 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1888 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1889 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1890 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1891
1892 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1893 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1894 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1895 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1896 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1897 allocated such a hard register.
1898
1899 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1900 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1901 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1902 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1903 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1904 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1905 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1906 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1907
1908 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1909 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1910 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1911 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1912 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1913 allocated such a hard register.
1914
1915 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1916 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1917 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1918 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1919 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1920 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1921 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1922 only if neither labeling works.
1923
1924 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1925 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1926 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1927 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1928 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1929 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1930 safe:
1931
1932 @example
1933 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1934 @end example
1935
1936 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1937 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1938 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1939 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1940 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1941
1942 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1943 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1944 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1945 certain kinds of registers.
1946
1947 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1948 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1949 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1950 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1951 @var{class}, unchanged.
1952
1953 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1954 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1955 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1956 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1957 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1958 ordinarily be used.
1959
1960 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1961 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1962
1963 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1964 smaller class.
1965
1966 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1967 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1968
1969 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1970 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1971 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1972 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1973 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1974 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1975 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1976 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1977 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1978 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1979 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1980 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1981 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1982 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1983 required.
1984
1985 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1986 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1987 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1988 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1989 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1990 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1991 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1992
1993 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1994 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1995 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1996 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1997 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1998 macros identically.
1999
2000 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2001 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2002 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2003 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2004 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2005
2006 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2007 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
2008 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2009 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
2010 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2011 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2012 register.
2013
2014 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
2015 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2016 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2017 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2018 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2019 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2020
2021 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2022 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2023 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
2024 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2025
2026 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2027 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2028 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2029 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2030 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
2031 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2032 general registers.
2033
2034 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
2035 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2036 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2037 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2038 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
2039 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2040 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2041 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2042
2043 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2044
2045 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
2046 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2047 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2048 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2049 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2050 defined by this macro.
2051
2052 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2053 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2054
2055 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2056 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2057 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2058 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2059 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2060 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2061 same as that of @var{mode}.
2062
2063 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2064 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2065 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2066 registers.
2067
2068 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2069 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2070 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2071 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2072 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2073 details.
2074
2075 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2076 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2077 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2078
2079 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2080 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2081 On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
2082 insns. Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
2083 to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
2084 if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
2085 insn.
2086
2087 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2088 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2089 compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of hard registers.
2090
2091 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2092 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2093 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2094 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2095 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2096 should not define this macro at all.
2097
2098 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2099 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2100 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2101 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2102 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2103
2104 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2105 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
2106 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
2107 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2108 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2109 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2110 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2111 register. If there would not be another register available for
2112 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2113 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2114 allocation.
2115
2116 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2117 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2118 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2119 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2120
2121 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2122 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2123 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2124 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2125
2126 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2127 in the reload pass.
2128
2129 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE
2130 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers for
2131 which the compiler may not change modes arbitrarily.
2132
2133 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P(@var{from}, @var{to})
2134 A C expression that is true if, for a register in
2135 @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE}, the requested mode punning is illegal.
2136
2137 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2138 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2139 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2140 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2141 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE}
2142 as @code{FLOAT_REGS} and @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P} restricts
2143 mode changes to same-size modes.
2144
2145 Compare this to IA-64, which extends floating-point values to 82-bits,
2146 and stores 64-bit integers in a different format than 64-bit doubles.
2147 Therefore @code{CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P} is always true.
2148 @end table
2149
2150 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2151 letters.
2152
2153 @table @code
2154 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2155 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2156 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2157 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2158 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2159 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2160 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2161 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2162 @var{value}.
2163
2164 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2165 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2166 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2167 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2168 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2169
2170 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2171 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2172 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2173 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2174
2175 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2176 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2177 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2178 between these kinds.
2179
2180 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2181 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2182 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2183 letters that can be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually
2184 memory references, for the target machine. Any letter that is not
2185 elsewhere defined and not matched by @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER}
2186 may be used. Normally this macro will not be defined.
2187
2188 If it is required for a particular target machine, it should return 1
2189 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by the
2190 constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2191 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2192
2193 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output
2194 in r0 if the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint
2195 letter @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2196 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2197 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2198 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2199 does not include r0 on the output.
2200 @end table
2201
2202 @node Stack and Calling
2203 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2204 @cindex calling conventions
2205
2206 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2207 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2208
2209 @menu
2210 * Frame Layout::
2211 * Stack Checking::
2212 * Frame Registers::
2213 * Elimination::
2214 * Stack Arguments::
2215 * Register Arguments::
2216 * Scalar Return::
2217 * Aggregate Return::
2218 * Caller Saves::
2219 * Function Entry::
2220 * Profiling::
2221 * Inlining::
2222 * Tail Calling::
2223 @end menu
2224
2225 @node Frame Layout
2226 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2227 @cindex stack frame layout
2228 @cindex frame layout
2229
2230 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2231 Here is the basic stack layout.
2232
2233 @table @code
2234 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2235 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2236 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2237 pointer to a smaller address.
2238
2239 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2240 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2241 definition used does not matter.
2242
2243 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2244 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2245 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2246 offsets from the frame pointer.
2247
2248 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2249 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2250 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2251 addresses on the stack.
2252
2253 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2254 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2255 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2256
2257 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2258 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2259 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2260 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2261 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2262 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2263
2264 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2265 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2266 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2267 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2268 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2269
2270 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2271 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2272
2273 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2274 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2275 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2276 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2277 function.
2278
2279 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2280 the first argument's address.
2281
2282 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2283 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2284 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2285 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2286
2287 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2288 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2289 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2290
2291 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2292 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2293 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2294 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2295 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2296 itself.
2297
2298 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2299 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2300 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2301
2302 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2303 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2304 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2305 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2306 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2307 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2308 define this macro.
2309
2310 @findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2311 @item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2312 If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2313 the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2314 The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2315 machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2316 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
2317
2318 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2319 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2320 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2321 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2322 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2323 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2324 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2325
2326 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2327 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2328 determine the return address of other frames.
2329
2330 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2331 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2332 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2333 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2334
2335 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2336 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2337 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2338 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2339 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2340 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2341 the stack.
2342
2343 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2344 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2345
2346 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2347 DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2348
2349 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2350 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2351 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2352 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2353 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2354 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2355 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2356
2357 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2358 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2359
2360 @findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2361 @item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2362 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2363 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2364 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2365 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2366 during virtual register instantiation.
2367
2368 The default value for this macro is @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl)},
2369 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2370 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2371 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2372 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2373
2374 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2375 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2376 DWARF 2.
2377
2378 @findex SMALL_STACK
2379 @item SMALL_STACK
2380 Define this macro if the stack size for the target is very small. This
2381 has the effect of disabling gcc's builtin @samp{alloca}, though
2382 @samp{__builtin_alloca} is not affected.
2383 @end table
2384
2385 @node Stack Checking
2386 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2387
2388 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2389 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2390
2391 @enumerate
2392 @item
2393 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2394 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2395 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2396 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GCC will do not other special processing.
2397
2398 @item
2399 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2400 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GCC will call that
2401 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2402 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2403 the stack pointer is out of range.
2404
2405 @item
2406 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2407 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2408 @end enumerate
2409
2410 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GCC
2411 will use the third approach.
2412
2413 @table @code
2414 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2415 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2416 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2417 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2418 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2419 checking in some more efficient way than GCC's portable approach.
2420 The default value of this macro is zero.
2421
2422 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2423 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2424 An integer representing the interval at which GCC must generate stack
2425 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2426 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2427 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2428
2429 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2430 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2431 A integer which is nonzero if GCC should perform the stack probe
2432 as a load instruction and zero if GCC should use a store instruction.
2433 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2434
2435 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2436 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2437 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2438 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2439 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2440
2441 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2442 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2443 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2444 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2445 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2446 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2447 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2448 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2449
2450 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2451 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2452 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2453 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2454 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2455 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2456 use the default of four words.
2457
2458 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2459 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2460 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2461 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2462 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2463 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2464 normally not need to override that default.
2465 @end table
2466
2467 @need 2000
2468 @node Frame Registers
2469 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2470
2471 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2472 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2473
2474 @table @code
2475 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2476 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2477 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2478 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2479 the hardware determines which register this is.
2480
2481 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2482 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2483 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2484 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2485 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2486 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2487
2488 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2489 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2490 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2491 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2492 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2493 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2494 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2495 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2496 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2497 used for the frame pointer.
2498
2499 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2500 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2501 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2502 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2503 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2504 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2505 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2506
2507 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2508 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2509
2510 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2511 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2512 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2513 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2514 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2515 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2516 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2517 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2518 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2519 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2520
2521 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2522 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2523 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2524 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2525 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2526 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2527 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2528 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2529
2530 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2531 address from the stack.
2532
2533 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2534 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2535 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2536 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2537 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2538 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2539 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2540 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2541 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2542 not be defined.@refill
2543
2544 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2545
2546 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2547 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2548
2549 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2550 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2551 @item STATIC_CHAIN
2552 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2553 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2554 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2555 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2556 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2557 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2558 the frame pointer.@refill
2559
2560 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2561 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2562 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2563 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2564 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2565 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2566
2567 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2568 be defined instead.
2569 @end table
2570
2571 @node Elimination
2572 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2573
2574 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2575 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2576
2577 @table @code
2578 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2579 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2580 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2581 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2582 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2583
2584 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2585 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2586 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2587 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2588 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2589
2590 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2591 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2592 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2593 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2594 them.@refill
2595
2596 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2597 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2598 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2599
2600 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2601 @findex get_frame_size
2602 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2603 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2604 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2605 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2606 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2607 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2608
2609 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2610 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2611 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2612 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2613
2614 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2615 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2616 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2617 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2618 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2619 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2620
2621 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2622 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2623
2624 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2625 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2626 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2627 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2628 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2629
2630 In this case, you might specify:
2631 @example
2632 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2633 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2634 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2635 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2636 @end example
2637
2638 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2639 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2640
2641 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2642 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2643 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2644 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2645 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2646 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2647 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2648 knows about.
2649
2650 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2651 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2652 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2653 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2654 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2655 defined.
2656
2657 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2658 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2659 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2660 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2661 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2662 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2663 @end table
2664
2665 @node Stack Arguments
2666 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2667 @cindex arguments on stack
2668 @cindex stack arguments
2669
2670 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2671 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2672 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2673
2674 @table @code
2675 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2676 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2677 A C expression whose value is nonzero if an argument declared in
2678 a prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should
2679 actually be passed as an @code{int}. In addition to avoiding
2680 errors in certain cases of mismatch, it also makes for better
2681 code on certain machines. If the macro is not defined in target
2682 header files, it defaults to 0.
2683
2684 @findex PUSH_ARGS
2685 @item PUSH_ARGS
2686 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
2687 outgoing arguments.
2688 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
2689 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
2690 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2691 it. When PUSH_ARGS is nonzero, PUSH_ROUNDING must be defined too.
2692 On some machines, the definition
2693
2694 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2695 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2696 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2697 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2698 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2699 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2700 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2701 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2702
2703 On some machines, the definition
2704
2705 @example
2706 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2707 @end example
2708
2709 @noindent
2710 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2711 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2712 alignment. Then the definition should be
2713
2714 @example
2715 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2716 @end example
2717
2718 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2719 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2720 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2721 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2722 will be computed and placed into the variable
2723 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2724 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2725 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2726
2727 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2728 is not proper.
2729
2730 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2731 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2732 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2733 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2734 registers.
2735
2736 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2737 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
2738 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
2739
2740 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2741 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2742 which.
2743 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2744 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2745
2746 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2747 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2748 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2749 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2750 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2751 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2752 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2753 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2754 function declaration.
2755
2756 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2757 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2758
2759 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2760 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2761 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2762 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2763 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2764
2765 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2766 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2767 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2768 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2769
2770 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2771 much space to reserve, GCC uses these two macros instead of
2772 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2773
2774 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2775 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2776 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2777 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2778
2779 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2780 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2781 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2782
2783 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2784 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2785 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2786 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2787 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2788 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2789
2790 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2791 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2792 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2793 stack in its natural location.
2794
2795 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2796 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2797 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2798 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2799 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2800 after the function returns.
2801
2802 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2803 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2804 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2805 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2806
2807 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2808 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2809 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2810 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2811 arguments (if known).
2812
2813 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2814 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2815 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2816 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2817 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2818 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2819
2820 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2821 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2822 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2823
2824 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2825 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2826 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2827 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2828 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2829 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2830 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2831 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2832 number of arguments.
2833 @end table
2834
2835 @node Register Arguments
2836 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2837 @cindex arguments in registers
2838 @cindex registers arguments
2839
2840 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2841 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2842 the stack.
2843
2844 @table @code
2845 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2846 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2847 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2848 in a register, and which register.
2849
2850 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2851 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2852 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2853 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2854 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2855 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2856
2857 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2858 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2859 argument on the stack.
2860
2861 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2862 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2863
2864 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2865 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2866 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2867 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2868 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each
2869 @code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2870 register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
2871 register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is. The
2872 second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
2873 the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
2874 As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
2875 RTX may have a first operand of zero. This indicates that the entire
2876 argument is also stored on the stack.
2877
2878 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2879 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2880 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2881 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2882 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2883
2884 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2885 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2886 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2887 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2888 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2889 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2890 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2891 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2892 a register.
2893
2894 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2895 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2896 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2897 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2898 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2899 documentation.
2900
2901 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2902 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2903 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2904 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2905 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2906 argument.
2907
2908 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2909 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2910 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2911 where the arguments will arrive.
2912
2913 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2914 serves both purposes.@refill
2915
2916 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2917 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2918 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2919 argument, that must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2920 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2921 pushed on the stack.
2922
2923 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2924 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2925 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2926 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2927 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2928 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2929 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2930 registers.
2931
2932 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2933 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2934 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2935
2936 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2937 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2938 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2939 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2940 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2941 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2942 to that type.
2943
2944 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2945 definition of this macro might be
2946 @smallexample
2947 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2948 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2949 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2950 @end smallexample
2951 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2952
2953 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2954 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2955 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2956 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2957 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2958 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2959 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2960 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2961 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2962 otherwise a copy must be made.
2963
2964 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2965 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2966 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2967 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2968 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2969 argument so far.
2970
2971 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2972 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2973 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2974 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2975 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2976 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2977
2978 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2979 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2980 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2981 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2982 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2983 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2984 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2985 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2986 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2987 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2988 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2989 being compiled.
2990
2991 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2992 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2993 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2994 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2995 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2996 never both of them at once.
2997
2998 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2999 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3000 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3001 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3002 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3003
3004 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3005 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC. The
3006 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3007 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3008 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3009 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3010
3011 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3012 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
3013 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
3014 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
3015 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
3016 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
3017 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
3018
3019 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
3020 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
3021 used for arguments without any special help.
3022
3023 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
3024 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3025 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3026 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3027 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3028 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3029
3030 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
3031 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
3032 it.
3033
3034 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3035 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3036 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3037 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3038
3039 @findex PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3040 @item PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3041 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3042 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3043 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3044 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3045 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3046
3047 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3048 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3049 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
3050 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
3051 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
3052
3053 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
3054 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3055 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3056 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3057 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3058 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3059 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3060 stack.
3061
3062 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3063 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
3064 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
3065 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
3066 argument is loaded first. This macro only affects arguments
3067 passed in registers.
3068
3069 @end table
3070
3071 @node Scalar Return
3072 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3073 @cindex return values in registers
3074 @cindex values, returned by functions
3075 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3076
3077 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3078 values---values that can fit in registers.
3079
3080 @table @code
3081 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3082 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3083 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
3084 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
3085
3086 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
3087 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3088 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
3089 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
3090 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
3091 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
3092 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
3093 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
3094 mode).@refill
3095
3096 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
3097 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
3098 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
3099 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
3100
3101 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
3102 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
3103 scalar type.
3104
3105 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
3106 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3107 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3108 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3109 known.@refill
3110
3111 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
3112 types, because these are returned in another way. See
3113 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3114
3115 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3116 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3117 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3118 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3119 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3120
3121 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3122 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3123 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3124 value.@refill
3125
3126 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3127 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3128
3129 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3130 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3131 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3132
3133 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3134 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3135 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3136 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3137 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3138 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3139 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3140 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3141 known.@refill
3142
3143 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3144 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3145 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3146 compiled.
3147
3148 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3149 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3150
3151 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3152 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3153 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3154 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3155
3156 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3157 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3158 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3159 suffices:
3160
3161 @example
3162 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3163 @end example
3164
3165 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3166 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3167 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3168
3169 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3170 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3171 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3172 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3173 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3174 @end table
3175
3176 @node Aggregate Return
3177 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3178 @cindex aggregates as return values
3179 @cindex large return values
3180 @cindex returning aggregate values
3181 @cindex structure value address
3182
3183 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3184 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3185 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3186 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3187 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3188
3189 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3190 memory.
3191
3192 @table @code
3193 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3194 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3195 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3196 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3197 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3198 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3199 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3200
3201 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3202 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3203 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3204 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3205 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3206 values, and 0 otherwise.
3207
3208 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3209 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3210 to indicate this.
3211
3212 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3213 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3214 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3215 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3216 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3217 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3218 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3219
3220 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3221
3222 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3223 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3224 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3225 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3226
3227 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3228 @item STRUCT_VALUE
3229 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3230 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3231 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3232 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3233
3234 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3235 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3236 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3237 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3238 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3239 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3240
3241 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3242 register, define this macro as the register number.
3243
3244 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3245 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3246 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3247 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3248 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3249 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3250 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3251 ``invisible'' first argument.
3252
3253 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3254 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3255 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3256 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3257 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3258
3259 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3260 pass an address to the subroutine.
3261
3262 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3263 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3264 @end table
3265
3266 @node Caller Saves
3267 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3268
3269 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3270 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3271 must live across calls.
3272
3273 @table @code
3274 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3275 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3276 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3277 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3278 for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3279 by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3280 levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
3281
3282 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3283 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3284 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3285 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3286 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3287 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3288
3289 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3290 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3291
3292 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE
3293 @item HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3294 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3295 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3296 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3297 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3298 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3299 @end table
3300
3301 @node Function Entry
3302 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3303 @cindex function entry and exit
3304 @cindex prologue
3305 @cindex epilogue
3306
3307 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3308 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3309
3310 @table @code
3311 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3312 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3313 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3314 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3315 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3316 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3317 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3318 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3319
3320 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3321 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3322
3323 @findex regs_ever_live
3324 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3325 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3326 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3327 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3328 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3329 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3330
3331 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3332 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3333 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3334 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3335 registers are used in the function.
3336
3337 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3338 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3339 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3340 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3341 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3342 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3343 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3344
3345 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3346 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3347 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3348 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3349 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3350 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3351 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3352 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3353 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3354 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3355
3356 @itemize @bullet
3357 @item
3358 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3359 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3360 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3361 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3362 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3363 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3364 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3365 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3366 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3367 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3368
3369 @item
3370 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3371 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3372 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3373 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3374 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3375 a save area.
3376
3377 @item
3378 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3379 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3380 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3381 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3382
3383 @item
3384 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3385 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3386 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3387 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3388 @end itemize
3389
3390 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3391 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3392 variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a function.
3393
3394 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3395 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3396 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3397 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3398 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3399 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3400
3401 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3402 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3403 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3404 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3405
3406 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3407 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3408 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3409 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3410 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3411
3412 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3413 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3414 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3415 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3416 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3417 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3418 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3419 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3420 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3421
3422 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3423 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3424 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3425 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3426
3427 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3428 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3429 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3430 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3431 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3432 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3433
3434 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3435 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3436 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3437 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3438 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3439 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3440
3441 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3442 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
3443 is nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3444
3445 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3446 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3447 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3448 number of arguments.
3449
3450 @findex current_function_pops_args
3451 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3452 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3453 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3454 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3455 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3456 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3457 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3458
3459 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3460 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3461 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3462 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3463 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3464 representing the number of delay slots there.
3465
3466 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3467 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3468 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3469 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3470
3471 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3472 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3473 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3474 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3475 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3476 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3477 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3478 slot.
3479
3480 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3481 @findex final_scan_insn
3482 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3483 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3484 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3485 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3486 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3487 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3488
3489 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3490 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3491
3492 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3493 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3494 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3495 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3496 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3497 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3498 the real function.
3499
3500 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3501 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3502 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3503 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3504 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3505 all other incoming arguments.
3506
3507 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3508 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3509 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3510 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3511
3512 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3513 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3514 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3515 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3516
3517 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3518 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3519 some targets, but probably not.
3520
3521 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3522 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3523 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3524 not support varargs.
3525 @end table
3526
3527 @node Profiling
3528 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3529 @cindex profiling, code generation
3530
3531 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3532
3533 @table @code
3534 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3535 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3536 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3537 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3538
3539 @findex mcount
3540 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3541 your operating system environment, not by GCC. To figure them out,
3542 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3543 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3544
3545 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3546 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3547 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3548 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3549
3550 @findex NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3551 @item NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3552 Define this macro if the @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does
3553 not need a counter variable allocated for each function. This is true
3554 for almost all modern implementations. If you define this macro, you
3555 must not use the @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3556
3557 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3558 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3559 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3560 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3561
3562 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3563 @vindex profile_block_flag
3564 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3565 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3566 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3567 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3568 distinguishes two profile modes.
3569
3570 @table @code
3571 @findex __bb_init_func
3572 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3573 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3574 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3575 allocated in the object module.
3576
3577 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3578
3579 @smallexample
3580 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3581 @end smallexample
3582
3583 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3584 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3585 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3586 that you know will result.
3587
3588 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3589 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3590 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3591 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3592 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3593 will not be called.
3594
3595 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3596
3597 @example
3598 cmp (LPBX0),0
3599 bne local_label
3600 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3601 call __bb_init_func
3602 local_label:
3603 @end example
3604
3605 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3606 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3607 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3608 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3609 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3610 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3611 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3612 module has been initialized already.
3613
3614 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3615 @example
3616 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3617 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3618 call __bb_init_trace_func
3619 @end example
3620 @end table
3621
3622 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3623 @vindex profile_block_flag
3624 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3625 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3626 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3627 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3628 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3629
3630 @table @code
3631 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3632 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3633 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3634 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3635 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3636 symbol made with this statement:
3637
3638 @smallexample
3639 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3640 @end smallexample
3641
3642 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3643 @c That is not an error.
3644 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3645 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3646 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3647 that you know will result.
3648
3649 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3653 @end smallexample
3654
3655 @vindex __bb
3656 @findex __bb_trace_func
3657 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3658 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3659 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3660 counter.
3661
3662 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3663 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3664 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3665 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3666 with this statement:
3667
3668 @smallexample
3669 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3670 @end smallexample
3671
3672 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3673 @example
3674 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3675 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3676 call __bb_trace_func
3677 @end example
3678 @end table
3679
3680 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3681 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3682 @vindex profile_block_flag
3683 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3684 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3685 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3686 assembler code should only be output
3687 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3688 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3689 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3690 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3691 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3692 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3693
3694 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3695 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3696 @findex __bb_trace_func
3697 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3698 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3699 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3700 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3701 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3702 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3703 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique label name.
3704
3705 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3706 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3707 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3708 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3709 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3710
3711 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3712 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3713 @findex __bb_trace_func
3714 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3715 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3716 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3717 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3718
3719 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3720 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3721 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3722 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3723 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3724
3725 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3726 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3727 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3728 support block profiling.
3729 @end table
3730
3731 @node Inlining
3732 @subsection Permitting inlining of functions with attributes
3733 @cindex inlining
3734
3735 By default if a function has a target specific attribute attached to it,
3736 it will not be inlined. This behaviour can be overridden if the target
3737 defines the @samp{FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P} macro. This macro
3738 takes one argument, a @samp{DECL} describing the function. It should
3739 return non-zero if the function can be inlined, otherwise it should
3740 return 0.
3741
3742 @node Tail Calling
3743 @subsection Permitting tail calls to functions
3744 @cindex tail calls
3745 @cindex sibling calls
3746
3747 @table @code
3748 @findex FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3749 @item FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL (@var{decl})
3750 A C expression that evaluates to true if it is ok to perform a sibling
3751 call to @var{decl}.
3752
3753 It is not uncommon for limitations of calling conventions to prevent
3754 tail calls to functions outside the current unit of translation, or
3755 during PIC compilation. Use this macro to enforce these restrictions,
3756 as the @code{sibcall} md pattern can not fail, or fall over to a
3757 ``normal'' call.
3758 @end table
3759
3760 @node Varargs
3761 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3762 @cindex varargs implementation
3763
3764 GCC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3765 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3766 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3767 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3768 conditionals to include it.
3769
3770 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3771 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3772 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3773 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3774 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3775 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3776
3777 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3778 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3779 below.
3780
3781 @table @code
3782 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3783 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3784 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3785 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3786 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3787 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3788
3789 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3790 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3791 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3792 @file{libgcc2.c}.
3793
3794 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3795 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3796 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3797 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3798 to use them for its own purposes.
3799 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3800 @c 10feb93
3801
3802 @findex __builtin_args_info
3803 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3804 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3805 registers.
3806
3807 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3808 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3809 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3810 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3811 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3812 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3813 registers in each category have been used so far
3814
3815 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3816 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3817 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3818 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3819
3820 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3821 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3822 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3823 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3824 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3825
3826 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3827 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3828 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3829 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3830 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3831 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3832 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3833 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3834 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3835 of the current function.
3836
3837 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3838 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3839 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3840 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3841 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3842 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3843 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3844
3845 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3846 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3847 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3848
3849 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3850 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3851 @end table
3852
3853 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3854
3855 @table @code
3856 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3857 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS ()
3858 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3859 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3860 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3861 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3862 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3863
3864 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3865 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3866 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3867 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3868 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3869 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3870 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3871 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3872
3873 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3874 structure, containing the values that are obtained after processing the
3875 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3876 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3877
3878 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3879 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3880 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3881 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3882 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3883 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3884
3885 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3886 compile time without knowing their data types,
3887 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3888 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3889 types.
3890
3891 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3892 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3893 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3894 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3895 not generate any instructions in this case.
3896
3897 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3898 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3899 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3900 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3901
3902 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3903 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3904 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3905 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3906 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3907 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3908 are treated as named.
3909
3910 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3911
3912 @findex PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3913 @item PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3914 If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
3915 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
3916 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
3917 defined, then define this macro to return nonzero if
3918 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, zero otherwise.
3919 Otherwise, you should not define this macro.
3920 @end table
3921
3922 @node Trampolines
3923 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3924 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3925 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3926
3927 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3928 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3929 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3930 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3931 trampoline.
3932
3933 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3934 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3935 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3936 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3937 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3938 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3939 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3940 operands.
3941
3942 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3943 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3944 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3945 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3946 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3947 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3948 separately.
3949
3950 @table @code
3951 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3952 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3953 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3954 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3955 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3956 automatically.
3957
3958 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3959 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3960 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3961 to generate it on the spot.
3962
3963 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3964 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3965 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3966 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3967 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3968 the section containing read-only data.
3969
3970 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3971 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3972 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3973
3974 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3975 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3976 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3977
3978 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3979 is used for aligning trampolines.
3980
3981 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3982 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3983 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3984 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3985 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3986 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3987 when it is called.
3988
3989 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3990 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3991 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3992 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3993 space for the trampoline.
3994
3995 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3996 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3997 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3998 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3999 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
4000 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
4001 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
4002 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
4003
4004 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
4005 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
4006 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
4007 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
4008 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
4009 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
4010 information.
4011 @end table
4012
4013 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
4014 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
4015 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
4016 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
4017
4018 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
4019 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
4020 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
4021 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
4022 latter makes initialization faster.
4023
4024 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
4025 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
4026
4027 @table @code
4028 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
4029 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
4030 The total size in bytes of the cache.
4031
4032 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
4033 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
4034 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
4035 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
4036 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
4037 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
4038 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
4039
4040 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
4041 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
4042 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
4043 location.
4044 @end table
4045
4046 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
4047 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
4048
4049 @table @code
4050 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
4051 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
4052 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
4053 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
4054 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
4055 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
4056 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
4057 expressions.
4058 @end table
4059
4060 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
4061 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
4062 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
4063 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
4064 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
4065
4066 @table @code
4067 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4068 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4069 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
4070 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
4071 which will be compiled with GCC. They go in a library function named
4072 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
4073
4074 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4075 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4076 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4077 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4078 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4079 special assembler code.
4080 @end table
4081
4082 @node Library Calls
4083 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4084 @cindex library subroutine names
4085 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4086
4087 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4088 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4089
4090 @table @code
4091 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
4092 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
4093 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4094 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
4095 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
4096 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4097
4098 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4099 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
4100 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4101 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
4102 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
4103 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4104
4105 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4106 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
4107 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4108 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4109 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
4110 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4111
4112 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
4113 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
4114 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4115 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
4116 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4117 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4118
4119 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4120 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4121 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4122 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4123 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4124 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4125
4126 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
4127 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
4128 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4129 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
4130 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
4131 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4132
4133 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4134 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4135 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4136 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
4137 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
4138 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4139
4140 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4141 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4142 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4143 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4144 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
4145 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4146
4147 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
4148 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
4149 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4150 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
4151 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4152 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4153
4154 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4155 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4156 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4157 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4158 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4159 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4160
4161 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4162 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4163 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4164 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4165 initializing all the normal library routines.
4166
4167 @findex FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4168 @item FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL
4169 Define this macro as a C statement that returns nonzero if a call to
4170 the floating point comparison library function will return a boolean
4171 value that indicates the result of the comparison. It should return
4172 zero if one of gcc's own libgcc functions is called.
4173
4174 Most ports don't need to define this macro.
4175
4176 @findex TARGET_EDOM
4177 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4178 @item TARGET_EDOM
4179 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4180 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4181 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4182 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4183 system.
4184
4185 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4186 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4187 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4188 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4189 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4190
4191 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4192 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4193 @item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4194 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4195 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4196 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4197 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4198
4199 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4200 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4201 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4202 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4203 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4204 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4205 Define this macro if GCC should generate calls to the System V
4206 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4207 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4208
4209 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4210 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4211 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4212 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4213 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4214 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4215 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4216 differently, such as the i860.
4217
4218 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4219 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4220 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4221 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4222 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4223
4224 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4225 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4226 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4227 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4228
4229 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4230 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4231 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4232
4233 @findex FLOATIFY
4234 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4235 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4236 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4237 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4238 field of the union.
4239
4240 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4241 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4242 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4243 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4244 use @code{int}.)
4245
4246 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4247 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4248 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4249
4250 @findex INTIFY
4251 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4252 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4253 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4254 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4255 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4256
4257 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4258 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4259
4260 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4261 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4262 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4263 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4264
4265 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4266 the value through that union.
4267
4268 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4269 @item nongcc_SI_type
4270 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4271 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4272
4273 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4274 is.
4275
4276 @findex nongcc_word_type
4277 @item nongcc_word_type
4278 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4279 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4280
4281 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4282 is.
4283
4284 @findex perform_@dots{}
4285 @item perform_@dots{}
4286 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4287 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4288 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4289 of these macros and their arguments.
4290
4291 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4292 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4293
4294 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4295 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4296 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4297 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4298 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4299 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4300
4301 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4302 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4303 @end table
4304
4305 @node Addressing Modes
4306 @section Addressing Modes
4307 @cindex addressing modes
4308
4309 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4310 This is about addressing modes.
4311
4312 @table @code
4313 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4314 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4315 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4316 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4317 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4318 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4319 @itemx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4320 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4321 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4322 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4323
4324 @findex HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4325 @findex HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4326 @item HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4327 @itemx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4328 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre- or
4329 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4330 the size of the memory operand.
4331
4332 @findex HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4333 @findex HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4334 @item HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4335 @itemx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4336 A C expression that is non-zero if the machine supports pre- or
4337 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4338
4339 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4340 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4341 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4342 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4343 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4344 in which constant addresses are supported.
4345
4346 @findex CONSTANT_P
4347 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4348 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4349 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4350 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4351
4352 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4353 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4354 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4355 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4356 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4357 accept.
4358
4359 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4360 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4361 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4362 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4363 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4364
4365 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4366 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4367 understand.
4368
4369 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4370 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4371 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4372 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4373 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4374 with no hard register must be rejected.
4375
4376 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4377 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4378 register is required.
4379
4380 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4381 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4382 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4383 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4384 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4385
4386 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4387 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4388 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4389 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4390 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4391
4392 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4393 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4394 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4395 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4396 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4397
4398 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4399 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4400 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4401 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4402 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4403
4404 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4405 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4406 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4407 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4408 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4409 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4410 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4411 Format}.
4412
4413 @findex saveable_obstack
4414 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4415 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4416 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4417 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4418 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4419 access the original name string.
4420
4421 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4422 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4423 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4424
4425 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4426 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4427 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4428 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4429 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4430 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4431 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4432 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4433 controls the one actually used.
4434
4435 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4436 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4437 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4438 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4439 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4440 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4441 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4442 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4443
4444 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4445 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4446 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4447 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4448
4449 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4450 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4451 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4452 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4453 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4454 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4455 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4456 only if neither labeling works.
4457
4458 @findex FIND_BASE_TERM
4459 @item FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4460 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x}.
4461 This macro is used in only one place: `find_base_term' in alias.c.
4462
4463 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4464 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4465
4466 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4467 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC.
4468
4469 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4470 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4471 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4472 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4473 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4474
4475 @example
4476 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4477 @end example
4478
4479 @noindent
4480 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4481
4482 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4483 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4484 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4485 @var{x}.
4486
4487 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4488 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4489 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4490
4491 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4492 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4493 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4494 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4495
4496 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4497 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4498 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4499 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4500 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4501 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4502 performance reasons.
4503
4504 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4505 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4506 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4507 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4508 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4509 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4510 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4511 be shared.
4512
4513 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4514 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4515 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4516 of reload internals.
4517
4518 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4519 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4520 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4521
4522 @findex push_reload
4523 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4524 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4525 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4526
4527 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4528 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4529 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4530 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4531 @code{push_reload}.
4532
4533 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4534 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4535 the address has become legitimate.
4536
4537 @findex copy_rtx
4538 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4539 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4540 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4541 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4542 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4543 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4544
4545 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4546 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4547 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4548 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4549 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4550 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4551 but not others.
4552
4553 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4554 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4555 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4556 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4557
4558 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4559
4560 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4561 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4562 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4563 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4564 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4565 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4566 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4567 @end table
4568
4569 @node Condition Code
4570 @section Condition Code Status
4571 @cindex condition code status
4572
4573 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4574 This describes the condition code status.
4575
4576 @findex cc_status
4577 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4578 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4579 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4580 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4581 currently based, and several standard flags.
4582
4583 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4584 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4585 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4586
4587 @table @code
4588 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4589 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4590 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4591 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4592
4593 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4594
4595 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4596 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4597 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4598 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4599 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4600 define this macro to initialize it.
4601
4602 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4603
4604 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4605 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4606 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4607 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4608 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4609 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4610 set @code{(cc0)}.
4611
4612 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4613
4614 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4615 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4616 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4617 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4618 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4619 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4620 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4621 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4622 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4623 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4624 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4625 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4626 condition code value.
4627
4628 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4629 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4630 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4631 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4632 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4633 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4634 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4635
4636 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4637 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4638 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4639 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4640
4641 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4642 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4643 A list of additional modes for condition code values in registers
4644 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). This macro should expand to a sequence of
4645 calls of the macro @code{CC} separated by white space. @code{CC} takes
4646 two arguments. The first is the enumeration name of the mode, which
4647 should begin with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}. The second is a C
4648 string giving the printable name of the mode; it should be the same as
4649 the first argument, but with the trailing @samp{mode} removed.
4650
4651 You should only define this macro if additional modes are required.
4652
4653 A sample definition of @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is:
4654 @smallexample
4655 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES \
4656 CC(CC_NOOVmode, "CC_NOOV") \
4657 CC(CCFPmode, "CCFP") \
4658 CC(CCFPEmode, "CCFPE")
4659 @end smallexample
4660
4661 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4662 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4663 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4664 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4665 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4666 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4667 definition)
4668
4669 @smallexample
4670 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4671 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4672 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4673 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4674 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4675 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4676 @end smallexample
4677
4678 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4679
4680 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4681 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4682 On some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4683 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4684 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4685 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4686
4687 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4688 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4689 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4690 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4691 @var{op1} as required.
4692
4693 GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4694 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4695 @file{md} file.
4696
4697 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4698 code or operands.
4699
4700 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4701 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4702 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4703 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4704 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4705 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4706
4707 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4708 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4709 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4710 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4711
4712 @smallexample
4713 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4714 @end smallexample
4715
4716 @end table
4717
4718 @node Costs
4719 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4720 @cindex costs of instructions
4721 @cindex relative costs
4722 @cindex speed of instructions
4723
4724 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4725 on the target machine.
4726
4727 @table @code
4728 @findex CONST_COSTS
4729 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4730 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4731 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4732 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4733 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4734 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4735 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4736 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4737 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4738 found in @var{outer_code}.
4739
4740 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4741 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4742
4743 @findex RTX_COSTS
4744 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4745 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4746 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4747 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4748 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4749 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4750 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4751 @var{x} is contained.
4752
4753 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4754 are adequate for the target machine.
4755
4756 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4757 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4758 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4759 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4760 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4761 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4762 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4763 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4764 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4765 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4766 value.
4767
4768 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4769 are adequate for the target machine.
4770
4771 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4772 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4773 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4774 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4775 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4776
4777 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4778 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4779 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4780 all addresses will have equal costs.
4781
4782 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4783 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4784 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4785
4786 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4787 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4788 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4789 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4790 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4791 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4792 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4793 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4794
4795 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4796
4797 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4798 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4799 assigned a different cost.
4800
4801 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4802 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4803 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4804 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4805 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4806 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4807 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4808 on machines with lots of registers.
4809
4810 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4811 constant.
4812
4813 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4814 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4815 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4816 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4817 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4818 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4819
4820 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4821 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4822 registers if they are not general registers.
4823
4824 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4825 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4826 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4827 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4828 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4829 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4830
4831 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4832 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4833 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4834 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4835 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4836 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4837 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4838 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4839
4840 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4841 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4842 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4843 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4844 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4845 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4846
4847 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4848 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4849 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4850 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4851 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4852 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4853 are the same as to this macro.
4854
4855 @findex BRANCH_COST
4856 @item BRANCH_COST
4857 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4858 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4859 @end table
4860
4861 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4862 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4863 ordinarily expect.
4864
4865 @table @code
4866 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4867 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4868 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4869 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4870 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4871 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4872 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4873
4874 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4875 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4876 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4877 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4878 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4879 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4880
4881 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4882 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4883 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4884 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4885 that is known to be zero.
4886
4887 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4888 recognize RTL structures like this:
4889
4890 @smallexample
4891 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4892 @end smallexample
4893
4894 @noindent
4895 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4896
4897 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4898 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4899 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4900 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4901 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4902 handler.
4903
4904 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4905 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4906 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4907 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4908 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4909
4910 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4911 this macro is defined, it should produce a non-zero value when
4912 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is non-zero.
4913
4914 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4915 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4916 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4917 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4918 than good.)
4919
4920 @findex MOVE_RATIO
4921 @item MOVE_RATIO
4922 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4923 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4924 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4925 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4926
4927 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4928 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4929 the number of such sequences.
4930
4931 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4932
4933 @findex MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
4934 @item MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4935 A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4936 copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
4937 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4938 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4939
4940 @findex MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4941 @item MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4942 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4943 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4944
4945 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT
4946 @item USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4947 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4948 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4949 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4950
4951 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT
4952 @item USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4953 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4954 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4955 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4956
4957 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT
4958 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4959 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4960 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4961 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4962
4963 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT
4964 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4965 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4966 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4967 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4968
4969 @findex USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT
4970 @item USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4971 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4972 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4973 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4974
4975 @findex USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT
4976 @item USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4977 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdeccrement is a good
4978 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4979 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4980
4981 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT
4982 @item USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4983 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4984 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4985 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4986
4987 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT
4988 @item USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4989 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4990 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4991 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4992
4993 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4994 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4995 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4996 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4997
4998 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4999 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
5000 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
5001 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
5002 register.
5003
5004 @findex ADJUST_COST
5005 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
5006 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
5007 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
5008 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
5009 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
5010 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
5011 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
5012
5013 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
5014 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
5015 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
5016 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
5017 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
5018 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
5019 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
5020 @end table
5021
5022 @node Sections
5023 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
5024 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
5025 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
5026
5027 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
5028 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
5029 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
5030 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
5031 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
5032 of sections.
5033
5034 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
5035 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
5036 can also define additional sections.
5037
5038 @table @code
5039 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5040 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5041 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
5042 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
5043 @code{".text"} is right.
5044
5045 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
5046 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
5047 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
5048 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
5049 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
5050
5051 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
5052 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
5053 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5054 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
5055 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
5056
5057 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5058 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5059 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5060 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
5061 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
5062 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
5063 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
5064 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
5065
5066 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5067 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
5068 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5069 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
5070 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
5071 will be used.
5072
5073 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5074 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5075 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5076 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
5077 code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not
5078 exist.
5079
5080 @findex FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
5081 @item FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
5082 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
5083 assembler opration to identify the following data as finalization
5084 code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist.
5085
5086 @findex CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION
5087 @item CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION
5088 If defined, a C statement that calls the function named as the sole
5089 argument of this macro. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
5090 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls to
5091 initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
5092 sections. By default, this macro is a simple function call. Some
5093 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
5094 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
5095 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
5096
5097 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
5098 @findex in_text
5099 @findex in_data
5100 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
5101 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
5102 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
5103 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
5104
5105 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
5106 @findex text_section
5107 @findex data_section
5108 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
5109 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
5110 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
5111 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
5112 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
5113
5114 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
5115 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
5116 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
5117 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
5118 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
5119 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
5120 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
5121
5122 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
5123 not be defined.
5124
5125 @findex SELECT_SECTION
5126 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
5127 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5128 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
5129 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
5130 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5131 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
5132 of the alternatives for other sections.
5133
5134 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
5135 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
5136
5137 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5138 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
5139 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
5140 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
5141 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
5142 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
5143 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
5144 sections.
5145
5146 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
5147 data section.
5148
5149 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5150 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5151 Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
5152 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5153 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5154 readonly data section is used.
5155
5156 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5157
5158 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5159 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
5160 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
5161 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
5162 symbol (such as what section it is in).
5163
5164 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
5165 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
5166 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
5167 @code{symbol_ref}.
5168
5169 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
5170 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
5171 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
5172 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
5173 information).
5174
5175 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5176 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
5177 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
5178 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
5179 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
5180
5181 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
5182 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
5183 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
5184 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
5185 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
5186 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
5187 unique sections.
5188
5189 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
5190 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
5191 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
5192 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
5193 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
5194 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GCC will use
5195 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name. Note - this
5196 macro can now be called for unitialised data items as well as
5197 initialised data and functions.
5198 @end table
5199
5200 @node PIC
5201 @section Position Independent Code
5202 @cindex position independent code
5203 @cindex PIC
5204
5205 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5206 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5207 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
5208 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
5209 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
5210 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
5211 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
5212 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
5213 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5214 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5215
5216 @table @code
5217 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5218 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5219 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5220 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5221 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
5222 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5223 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5224 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5225 necessary).
5226
5227 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5228 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5229 Define this macro if the register defined by
5230 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
5231 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5232
5233 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
5234 @item FINALIZE_PIC
5235 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
5236 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
5237 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
5238 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
5239 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
5240 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
5241
5242 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
5243 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
5244 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
5245 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
5246 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
5247 assembly language.)
5248
5249 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
5250 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5251 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5252 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5253 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5254 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5255 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5256 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5257 position independent code.
5258 @end table
5259
5260 @node Assembler Format
5261 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5262
5263 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5264 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5265 instructions do.
5266
5267 @menu
5268 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5269 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5270 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5271 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5272 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5273 and termination routines.
5274 * Macros for Initialization::
5275 Specific macros that control the handling of
5276 initialization and termination routines.
5277 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5278 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5279 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5280 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5281 @end menu
5282
5283 @node File Framework
5284 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5285 @cindex assembler format
5286 @cindex output of assembler code
5287
5288 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5289 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5290
5291 @table @code
5292 @findex ASM_FILE_START
5293 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5294 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5295 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5296
5297 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5298 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5299 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5300 checking for certain assembler constructs.
5301
5302 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5303 see @file{attasm.h}.
5304
5305 @findex ASM_FILE_END
5306 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5307 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5308 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5309
5310 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5311 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5312 definition.
5313
5314 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5315 see @file{attasm.h}.
5316
5317 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5318 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5319 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5320 the object file as having been compiled with GCC (or another
5321 GNU compiler).
5322
5323 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5324 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5325 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5326 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5327 symbol table of an executable.
5328
5329 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5330 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5331 define this macro with an empty body.
5332
5333 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5334 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
5335 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5336 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5337 the end of the line.
5338
5339 @findex ASM_APP_ON
5340 @item ASM_APP_ON
5341 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5342 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5343 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5344 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5345 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5346
5347 @findex ASM_APP_OFF
5348 @item ASM_APP_OFF
5349 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5350 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5351 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5352 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5353
5354 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5355 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5356 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5357 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5358 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5359
5360 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5361 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5362
5363 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5364 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5365 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5366 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5367 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5368 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5369 of the filename using this macro.
5370
5371 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5372 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5373 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5374 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5375 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5376
5377 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5378 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5379
5380 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5381 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5382 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5383 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5384 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5385
5386 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5387 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5388 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5389 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5390 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5391 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5392 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5393 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5394
5395 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5396 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5397
5398 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5399 @item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5400 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5401 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5402 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5403 @end table
5404
5405 @need 2000
5406 @node Data Output
5407 @subsection Output of Data
5408
5409 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5410 This describes data output.
5411
5412 @table @code
5413 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5414 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5415 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5416 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5417 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5418 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5419 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5420 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5421 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5422 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5423 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5424 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5425 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5426 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5427 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5428 definitions.
5429
5430 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5431 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5432 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5433 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5434 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5435 @findex output_addr_const
5436 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5437 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5438 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5439 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5440 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5441 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5442 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5443 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5444 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5445 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5446 as an assembler expression.@refill
5447
5448 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5449 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5450 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5451 the macro.
5452
5453 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5454 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5455 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5456 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5457
5458 @findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5459 @item ASM_BYTE_OP
5460 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5461 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5462 @code{"byte"}.
5463
5464 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5465 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5466 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5467 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5468 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5469 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5470
5471 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5472 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5473 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5474
5475 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5476 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5477 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5478 expression to have a non-zero value if GCC should output the constant
5479 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5480 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5481 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5482 pool before the function.
5483
5484 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5485 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5486 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5487 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5488 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5489 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5490 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5491 immediately after this call.
5492
5493 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5494 not be defined.
5495
5496 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5497 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5498 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5499 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5500 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5501
5502 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5503 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5504 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5505 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5506 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5507 alignment.
5508
5509 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5510 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5511 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5512 Here is how to do this:
5513
5514 @example
5515 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5516 @end example
5517
5518 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5519 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5520 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5521
5522 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5523
5524 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5525 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5526 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5527 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5528 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5529 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5530
5531 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5532 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5533 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5534 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5535 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5536 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5537 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5538
5539 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5540 define this macro.
5541
5542 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5543 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5544 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5545 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5546
5547 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5548 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5549
5550
5551 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5552 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5553 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5554 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5555 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5556 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5557 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5558
5559 @example
5560 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5561 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5562 @end example
5563 @end table
5564
5565 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5566 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5567
5568 @table @code
5569 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5570 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5571 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5572 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5573 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5574 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5575 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5576 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5577 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5578 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5579 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5580 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5581 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5582
5583 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5584 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5585 machine's memory.
5586
5587 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5588 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5589 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5590 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5591 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5592 of space to hold the result.
5593
5594 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5595 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5596 @end table
5597
5598 @node Uninitialized Data
5599 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5600
5601 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5602 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5603
5604 @table @code
5605 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5606 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5607 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5608 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5609 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5610 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5611
5612 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5613 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5614 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5615
5616 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5617 common global variables are output.
5618
5619 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5620 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5621 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5622 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5623 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5624 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5625 as the number of bits.
5626
5627 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5628 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5629 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5630 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5631 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5632 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5633 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5634 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5635
5636 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5637 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5638 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5639 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5640 will be used.
5641
5642 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5643 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5644 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5645 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5646 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5647 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5648
5649 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5650 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5651 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5652 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5653 the name, and a newline.
5654
5655 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5656 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5657 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5658 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5659 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5660 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5661 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5662
5663 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5664 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5665 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5666 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5667 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5668 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5669 as the number of bits.
5670
5671 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5672 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5673
5674 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5675 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5676 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5677 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5678 will be used.
5679
5680 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5681 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5682 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5683 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5684 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5685 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5686
5687 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5688 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5689 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5690
5691 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5692 static variables are output.
5693
5694 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5695 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5696 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5697 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5698 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5699 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5700 as the number of bits.
5701
5702 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5703 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5704 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5705 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5706 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5707 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5708 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5709 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5710
5711 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5712 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5713 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5714 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5715 will be used.
5716 @end table
5717
5718 @node Label Output
5719 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5720
5721 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5722 This is about outputting labels.
5723
5724 @table @code
5725 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5726 @findex assemble_name
5727 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5728 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5729 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5730 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5731 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5732 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5733
5734 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5735 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5736 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5737 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5738 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5739 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5740 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5741 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5742
5743 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5744 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5745
5746 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5747 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5748 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5749 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5750 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5751 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5752 representing the function.
5753
5754 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5755
5756 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5757 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5758 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5759 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5760 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5761 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5762 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5763
5764 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5765 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5766
5767 @findex ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL
5768 @item ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5769 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5770 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5771 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5772
5773 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5774 nothing.
5775
5776 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5777 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5778 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5779 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5780 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5781 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5782 something about the size of the object.
5783
5784 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5785 nothing.
5786
5787 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5788 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5789 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5790 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5791 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5792 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5793 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5794 for making that name global, and a newline.
5795
5796 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5797 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5798 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5799 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5800 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5801 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5802 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5803 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5804 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5805
5806 If you don't define this macro, GCC will not support weak
5807 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5808
5809 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5810 @item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5811 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5812
5813 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5814 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5815 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5816 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5817 @samp{-melf}.
5818
5819 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5820 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5821 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5822 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5823 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5824 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5825 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5826 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5827
5828 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5829 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5830 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5831 semantics.
5832
5833 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5834 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5835 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5836 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5837 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5838 be emitted as one-only.
5839
5840 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5841 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5842 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5843 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5844 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5845 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5846 declaration.
5847
5848 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5849 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5850
5851 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5852 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5853 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5854 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5855 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5856 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5857
5858 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5859 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5860
5861 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5862 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5863 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5864 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5865 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5866 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5867 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5868
5869 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5870 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5871 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5872 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5873 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5874 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5875 @end ignore
5876
5877 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5878 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5879 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5880 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5881
5882 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5883 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5884 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5885
5886 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5887 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5888 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5889 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5890 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5891
5892 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5893
5894 @example
5895 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5896 @end example
5897
5898 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME
5899 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5900 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} the string
5901 @var{string}.
5902
5903 The default definition of this macro is as follows:
5904
5905 @example
5906 fprintf (@var{stream}, "%s:\n", LABEL_ALTERNATE_NAME (INSN))
5907 @end example
5908
5909 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5910 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5911 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5912 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5913
5914 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5915 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5916 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5917
5918 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5919 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5920 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5921 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5922 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5923 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5924 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5925
5926 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5927 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5928 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5929 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5930 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5931 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5932
5933 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5934 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5935 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5936 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5937 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5938 internal static variables in different scopes.
5939
5940 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5941 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5942 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5943 between the name and the number will suffice.
5944
5945 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5946 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5947 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5948 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5949
5950 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5951 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5952 correct for most systems.
5953
5954 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS
5955 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5956 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5957 which defines (equates) the symbol whoes tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5958 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5959 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5960 the tree nodes are available.
5961
5962 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5963 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5964 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5965 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5966 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5967 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GCC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5968 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5969 resolves into a constant.
5970
5971 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5972 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5973 correct for most systems.
5974
5975 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5976 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5977 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5978 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5979 @var{value}.
5980
5981 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5982 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5983
5984 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5985 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5986 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5987 Objective C methods.
5988
5989 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5990 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5991 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5992 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5993
5994 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5995 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5996 systems define other ways of computing names.
5997
5998 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5999 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
6000 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
6001 50 characters extra.
6002
6003 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
6004 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
6005 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
6006 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
6007
6008 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
6009 macro to provide more human-readable names.
6010 @end table
6011
6012 @node Initialization
6013 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
6014 @cindex initialization routines
6015 @cindex termination routines
6016 @cindex constructors, output of
6017 @cindex destructors, output of
6018
6019 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
6020 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
6021 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
6022 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
6023 @code{main} is called.
6024
6025 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
6026 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
6027 terminates.
6028
6029 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
6030 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
6031 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
6032 system, you need to specify how to do this.
6033
6034 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
6035 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
6036 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
6037
6038 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
6039 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
6040 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
6041 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
6042 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
6043
6044 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
6045 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
6046 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
6047 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
6048 pointer containing zero.
6049
6050 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
6051 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
6052 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
6053 list; destructors in forward order.
6054
6055 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
6056 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
6057 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
6058 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
6059 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
6060 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
6061 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
6062 Termination functions are handled similarly.
6063
6064 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
6065 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
6066 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
6067
6068 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
6069 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
6070 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
6071 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6072 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
6073
6074 @example
6075 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
6076 @end example
6077
6078 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
6079 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
6080 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
6081 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
6082 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
6083 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
6084
6085 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6086 macro properly.
6087
6088 If no init section is available, do not define
6089 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
6090 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
6091 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
6092 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6093 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
6094 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
6095
6096 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6097 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6098 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6099 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6100 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6101 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6102 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6103 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6104 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6105 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6106 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6107 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6108 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6109 the initialization process.
6110
6111 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6112 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6113 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
6114 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
6115 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
6116 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
6117 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
6118 linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running the ordinary
6119 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
6120 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
6121 described above.
6122
6123 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
6124 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
6125 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
6126 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
6127 configuration file. These files are:
6128
6129 @table @file
6130 @item aoutos.h
6131 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
6132
6133 @item next.h
6134 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
6135
6136 @item svr3.h
6137 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
6138
6139 @item svr4.h
6140 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
6141
6142 @item vms.h
6143 For the VMS operating system.
6144 @end table
6145
6146 @ifinfo
6147 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6148 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6149 @end ifinfo
6150
6151 @node Macros for Initialization
6152 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6153
6154 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6155 and termination functions:
6156
6157 @table @code
6158 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6159 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6160 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
6161 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GCC will
6162 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
6163 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
6164 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
6165 initialization functions.
6166
6167 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
6168 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
6169 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6170 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
6171 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6172 be defined explicitly for systems that support
6173 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6174
6175 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
6176 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
6177 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6178 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6179
6180 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
6181 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
6182 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6183 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6184
6185 @item INVOKE__main
6186 @findex INVOKE__main
6187 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6188 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6189 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6190 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6191
6192 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6193 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
6194 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
6195 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
6196 initialization time.
6197
6198 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
6199 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
6200 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
6201 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
6202 underscore.
6203
6204 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
6205 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
6206 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
6207 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
6208 names.
6209
6210 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6211 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
6212 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
6213 functions rather than initialization functions.
6214
6215 When @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} are
6216 defined, the initializaiton routine generated for the generated object
6217 file will have static linkage.
6218 @end table
6219
6220 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
6221 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
6222 object file for constructor functions to be called. On such systems you
6223 must not define @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}
6224 as the object file's initialization routine must have global scope.
6225
6226 On certain kinds of systems, you can define these macros to make
6227 @code{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6228
6229 @table @code
6230 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6231 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6232 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6233 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6234 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6235
6236 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6237 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6238 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
6239 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
6240 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6241
6242 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
6243 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
6244
6245 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6246 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6247 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6248 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6249 @code{nm}.
6250
6251 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6252 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6253 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6254 termination functions in shared libraries:
6255
6256 @findex LDD_SUFFIX
6257 @item LDD_SUFFIX
6258 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
6259 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
6260
6261 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
6262 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
6263 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6264 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
6265 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6266 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6267 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
6268 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
6269
6270 @end table
6271
6272 @node Instruction Output
6273 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6274
6275 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6276 This describes assembler instruction output.
6277
6278 @table @code
6279 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
6280 @item REGISTER_NAMES
6281 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6282 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6283 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6284
6285 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6286 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6287 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6288 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6289 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6290 to registers using alternate names.
6291
6292 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
6293 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6294 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6295 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6296
6297 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6298 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6299 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6300 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6301 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6302 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6303 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6304 so that it will not be output twice.
6305
6306 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6307 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6308 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6309 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6310 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6311
6312 @findex recog_operand
6313 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6314 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6315
6316 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6317 in the usual way.
6318
6319 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6320 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6321 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6322 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6323 they will be output differently.
6324
6325 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6326 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6327 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6328 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6329 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6330 by changing the contents of the vector.
6331
6332 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6333 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6334 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6335 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6336 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6337 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6338
6339 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6340
6341 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6342 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6343 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6344 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6345 @var{noperands} will be zero.
6346
6347 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
6348 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6349 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6350 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6351 RTL expression.
6352
6353 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6354 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6355 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6356 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6357 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6358 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6359 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6360
6361 @findex reg_names
6362 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6363 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6364 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6365 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6366
6367 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6368 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6369 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6370 @var{code}.
6371
6372 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6373 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6374 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6375 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6376 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6377 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6378 in this way.
6379
6380 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6381 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6382 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6383 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6384 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6385
6386 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6387 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6388 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6389 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6390 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6391
6392 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6393 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6394 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6395 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6396 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6397 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6398 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6399 or whatever.
6400
6401 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6402 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6403 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6404
6405 @findex final_sequence
6406 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6407 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6408 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6409 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6410 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6411 being output.
6412
6413 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6414 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6415 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6416 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6417 @findex asm_fprintf
6418 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6419 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6420 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6421 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6422 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6423 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6424 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6425 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6426 files can define these macros differently.
6427
6428 @item ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS(@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6429 @findex ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS
6430 If defiend this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6431 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6432 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6433 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6434 statements. Noet that upper case letters are reserved for future
6435 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6436 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6437 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6438 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6439 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6440
6441 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6442 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6443 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6444 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6445 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6446 first variant.
6447
6448 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6449 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6450 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6451 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6452 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6453 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6454 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6455
6456 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6457 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6458 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6459
6460 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6461 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6462 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6463 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6464 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6465 opcodes or operand order.
6466
6467 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6468 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6469 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6470 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6471 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6472 profiling.
6473
6474 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6475 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6476 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6477 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6478 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6479 profiling.
6480 @end table
6481
6482 @node Dispatch Tables
6483 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6484
6485 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6486 This concerns dispatch tables.
6487
6488 @table @code
6489 @cindex dispatch table
6490 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6491 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6492 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6493 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6494 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6495 definitions of these labels are output using
6496 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6497 way here. For example,
6498
6499 @example
6500 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6501 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6502 @end example
6503
6504 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6505 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6506 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6507 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6508 mode and flags can be read.
6509
6510 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6511 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6512 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6513 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6514
6515 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6516 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6517 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6518 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6519 For example,
6520
6521 @example
6522 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6523 @end example
6524
6525 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6526 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6527 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6528 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6529 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6530 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6531 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6532
6533 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6534 for the table.
6535
6536 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6537 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6538
6539 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6540 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6541 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6542 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6543 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6544 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6545 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6546 of the preceding label.
6547
6548 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6549 the jump-table.
6550 @end table
6551
6552 @node Exception Region Output
6553 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6554
6555 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6556
6557 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6558 region.
6559
6560 @table @code
6561 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6562 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6563 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6564
6565 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6566
6567 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6568 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6569 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6570
6571 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6572
6573 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6574 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6575 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6576 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6577 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6578 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6579 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6580 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6581
6582 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6583 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6584 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6585 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6586 defined, GCC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6587 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6588 appropriate section.
6589
6590 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6591 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6592
6593 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6594 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6595 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6596 should be omitted.
6597
6598 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6599
6600 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6601 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6602 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6603 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6604
6605 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6606
6607 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6608 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6609 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6610 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6611 for details on when to define this, and how.
6612
6613 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6614 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6615 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6616 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6617
6618 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6619 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6620 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6621 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6622 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6623 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6624 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6625 1.
6626
6627 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6628 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6629 default.
6630
6631 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6632 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6633
6634 @end table
6635
6636 @node Alignment Output
6637 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6638
6639 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6640 This describes commands for alignment.
6641
6642 @table @code
6643 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6644 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6645 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6646 a BARRIER.
6647
6648 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6649 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6650 define the macro.
6651
6652 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6653 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6654 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6655 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}
6656 implementation.
6657
6658 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6659 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6660 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying
6661 @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}. This works only if
6662 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6663
6664 @findex LOOP_ALIGN
6665 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6666 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6667 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6668
6669 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6670 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6671 define the macro.
6672
6673 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6674 to set the variable @var{align_loops} in the target's
6675 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6676 selection in @var{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6677
6678 @findex LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6679 @item LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6680 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LOOP_ALIGN}.
6681 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6682
6683 @findex LABEL_ALIGN
6684 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6685 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6686 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6687 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6688
6689 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6690 to set the variable @var{align_labels} in the target's
6691 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6692 selection in @var{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6693
6694 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6695 @item LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6696 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LABEL_ALIGN}.
6697 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6698
6699 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6700 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6701 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6702 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6703 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6704 expression of type @code{int}.
6705
6706 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6707 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6708 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6709 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6710 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6711 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6712 section.
6713
6714 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6715 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6716 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6717 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6718 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6719
6720 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN
6721 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6722 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6723 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6724 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6725 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6726 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6727 @end table
6728
6729 @need 3000
6730 @node Debugging Info
6731 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6732
6733 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6734 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6735
6736 @menu
6737 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6738 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6739 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6740 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6741 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6742 @end menu
6743
6744 @node All Debuggers
6745 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6746
6747 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6748 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6749
6750 @table @code
6751 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6752 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6753 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6754 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6755 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6756 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6757 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6758 the compiler and another for DBX.
6759
6760 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6761 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6762 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6763 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6764 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6765
6766 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6767 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6768 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6769
6770 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6771 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6772 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6773 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6774 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6775 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6776 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6777 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6778 @samp{-g} options is used.
6779
6780 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6781 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6782 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6783 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6784 @var{offset}.
6785
6786 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6787 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6788 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6789 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6790 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6791 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6792 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6793 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
6794
6795 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6796 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6797 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6798 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GCC uses the
6799 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6800 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6801
6802 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6803 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6804 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6805 @end table
6806
6807 @node DBX Options
6808 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6809
6810 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6811 These are specific options for DBX output.
6812
6813 @table @code
6814 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6815 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6816 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6817 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6818
6819 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6820 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6821 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6822 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6823
6824 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6825 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6826 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6827 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6828 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6829 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6830 if there is any occasion to.
6831
6832 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6833 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6834 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6835 in the text section.
6836
6837 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6838 @item ASM_STABS_OP
6839 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6840 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6841 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6842 DBX debugging information format.
6843
6844 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6845 @item ASM_STABD_OP
6846 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6847 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6848 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6849 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6850
6851 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6852 @item ASM_STABN_OP
6853 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6854 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6855 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6856 DBX debugging information format.
6857
6858 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6859 @item DBX_NO_XREFS
6860 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6861 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6862 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6863 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6864
6865 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6866 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6867 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6868 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6869 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6870 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6871 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6872 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6873 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6874
6875 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6876 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6877 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6878 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6879 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6880 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6881 if backslash is correct for your system.
6882
6883 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6884 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6885 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6886 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6887 variable.
6888
6889 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6890 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6891 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6892 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6893
6894 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6895 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6896 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6897 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6898 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6899
6900 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6901 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6902 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6903 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6904 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6905
6906 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6907 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6908 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6909 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6910 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6911
6912 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6913 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6914 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6915 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6916
6917 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6918 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6919 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6920 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6921 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6922 code.
6923
6924 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6925 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6926 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6927 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6928 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6929 first.
6930
6931 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6932 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6933 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6934 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6935 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6936
6937 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6938 @item DBX_USE_BINCL
6939 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6940 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6941 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6942 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6943 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6944 number for a type number.
6945 @end table
6946
6947 @node DBX Hooks
6948 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6949
6950 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6951 These are hooks for DBX format.
6952
6953 @table @code
6954 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6955 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6956 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6957 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6958 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6959 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6960
6961 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6962 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6963 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6964
6965 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6966 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6967 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6968 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6969 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6970 for the type @var{type}.
6971
6972 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6973 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6974 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6975 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6976 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6977 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6978 the function.
6979
6980 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6981 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6982 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6983 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6984 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6985 global symbols, including names of data types.
6986
6987 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6988 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6989 particular language in no particular order.
6990
6991 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6992 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6993 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6994 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6995
6996 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6997 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6998 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6999 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
7000 Here is an example:
7001
7002 @smallexample
7003 @{
7004 tree decl;
7005 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
7006 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
7007 "long int"))
7008 dbxout_symbol (decl);
7009 @dots{}
7010 @}
7011 @end smallexample
7012
7013 @noindent
7014 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
7015
7016 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
7017 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
7018
7019 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
7020
7021 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
7022 @smallexample
7023 @{
7024 tree decl;
7025 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
7026 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
7027 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
7028 == INTEGER_CST)
7029 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
7030 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
7031 @group
7032 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
7033 dbxout_symbol (decl);
7034 @dots{}
7035 @}
7036 @end group
7037 @end smallexample
7038
7039 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
7040 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
7041 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
7042 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
7043 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
7044 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
7045
7046 @end table
7047
7048 @node File Names and DBX
7049 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
7050
7051 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7052 This describes file names in DBX format.
7053
7054 @table @code
7055 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
7056 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
7057 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
7058 object file.
7059
7060 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
7061 enabled.
7062
7063 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
7064 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7065 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7066 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
7067 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
7068 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
7069
7070 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7071 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7072
7073 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
7074 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7075 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7076 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
7077 compilation is named @var{name}.
7078
7079 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7080 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7081
7082 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
7083 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7084 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
7085 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
7086
7087 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
7088 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
7089
7090 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
7091 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7092 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7093 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
7094 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
7095 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
7096 or a @samp{#line} command.
7097
7098 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7099 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7100 @end table
7101
7102 @need 2000
7103 @node SDB and DWARF
7104 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7105
7106 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7107 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7108
7109 @table @code
7110 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7111 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7112 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7113 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7114
7115 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
7116 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
7117 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf format debugging output
7118 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7119
7120 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7121 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7122 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7123 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
7124
7125 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7126 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7127 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7128 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7129 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7130
7131 @findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7132 @item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7133 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7134 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
7135 (@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GCC will output this
7136 information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7137
7138 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
7139 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
7140 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
7141 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GCC will use Dwarf
7142 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
7143 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
7144
7145 @findex DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7146 @item DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
7147 By default, the Dwarf 2 debugging information generator will generate a
7148 label to mark the beginning of the text section. If it is better simply
7149 to use the name of the text section itself, rather than an explicit label,
7150 to indicate the beginning of the text section, define this macro to zero.
7151
7152 @findex DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7153 @item DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7154 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7155 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7156 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7157
7158 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7159 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7160 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7161 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7162 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7163 not define them yourself.
7164
7165 @findex SDB_DELIM
7166 @item SDB_DELIM
7167 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7168 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7169 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7170 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7171 required.
7172
7173 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7174 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
7175 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
7176 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
7177 more information.
7178
7179 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7180 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7181 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7182 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7183 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7184 it.
7185
7186 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7187 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7188 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7189 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7190 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7191 @end table
7192
7193 @node Cross-compilation
7194 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7195 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7196 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7197
7198 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
7199 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7200 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7201 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7202 doing the compilation.
7203
7204 @findex atof
7205 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7206 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
7207 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
7208 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
7209 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
7210 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
7211 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
7212 at all).
7213
7214 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
7215 compiling between different floating point formats.
7216
7217 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
7218 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
7219
7220 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
7221 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
7222
7223 @table @code
7224 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7225 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7226 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
7227 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
7228 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
7229
7230 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
7231 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
7232 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
7233 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7234
7235 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
7236 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
7237 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
7238 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
7239 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
7240 representation.
7241
7242 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
7243 @findex ldexp
7244 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
7245 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
7246 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
7247 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
7248 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
7249 integer.
7250
7251 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
7252 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
7253 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7254 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
7255 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7256
7257 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
7258 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
7259 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7260 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
7261 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7262
7263 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
7264 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7265 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7266 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
7267 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
7268 and so does the value.
7269
7270 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
7271 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7272 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7273 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
7274 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
7275 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
7276
7277 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
7278 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
7279 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
7280 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
7281 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
7282 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7283
7284 @findex REAL_INFINITY
7285 @item REAL_INFINITY
7286 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
7287 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
7288
7289 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
7290 @findex isinf
7291 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
7292 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7293 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
7294 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
7295
7296 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
7297 @findex isnan
7298 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
7299 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7300 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
7301 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
7302 @end table
7303
7304 @cindex constant folding and floating point
7305 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
7306 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
7307 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
7308 will not happen for floating point values.
7309
7310 @table @code
7311 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
7312 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
7313 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
7314 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
7315 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
7316 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
7317 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
7318
7319 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
7320 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
7321 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
7322 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
7323
7324 @cindex overflow while constant folding
7325 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
7326 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
7327 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
7328 arithmetic operation requested.
7329
7330 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
7331 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
7332 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
7333 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
7334 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
7335 floating point representation.
7336
7337 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
7338 can't happen in the negation operation.
7339
7340 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
7341 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
7342 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
7343 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
7344
7345 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
7346 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7347 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
7348 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
7349 @var{mode}.
7350
7351 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
7352
7353 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
7354 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
7355 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
7356 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
7357 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
7358
7359 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
7360 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
7361 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
7362 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7363 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7364 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7365 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7366 @end table
7367
7368 @node Mode Switching
7369 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7370 @cindex mode switching
7371 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7372
7373 @table @code
7374 @findex OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING
7375 @item OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7376 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7377 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7378
7379 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7380 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7381 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7382 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7383 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7384 be inserted before reload, i.e. you can't put this into instruction emitting
7385 or MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG.
7386
7387 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7388 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7389 return non-zero for any @var{entity} that that needs mode-switching.
7390 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7391 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{MODE_NEEDED},
7392 @code{MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE} and @code{EMIT_MODE_SET}.
7393 @code{NORMAL_MODE} is optional.
7394
7395 @findex NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7396 @item NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7397 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7398 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7399 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7400 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7401 The position of the initializer in the initializer - starting counting at
7402 zero - determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7403 entity in question.
7404 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7405 represented as numbers 0 .. N - 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7406 switch is needed / supplied.
7407
7408 @findex MODE_NEEDED
7409 @item MODE_NEEDED (@var{entity}, @var{insn})
7410 @var{entity} is an integer specifying a mode-switched entity. If
7411 @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} is defined, you must define this macro to
7412 return an integer value not larger than the corresponding element in
7413 NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING, to denote the mode that @var{entity} must
7414 be switched into prior to the execution of INSN.
7415
7416 @findex NORMAL_MODE
7417 @item NORMAL_MODE (@var{entity})
7418 If this macro is defined, it is evaluated for every @var{entity} that needs
7419 mode switching. It should evaluate to an integer, which is a mode that
7420 @var{entity} is assumed to be switched to at function entry and exit.
7421
7422 @findex MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE
7423 @item MODE_PRIORITY_TO_MODE (@var{entity}, @var{n})
7424 This macro specifies the order in which modes for ENTITY are processed.
7425 0 is the highest priority, NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING[ENTITY] - 1 the
7426 lowest. The value of the macro should be an integer designating a mode
7427 for ENTITY. For any fixed @var{entity}, @code{mode_priority_to_mode}
7428 (@var{entity}, @var{n}) shall be a bijection in 0 ..
7429 @code{num_modes_for_mode_switching}[@var{entity}] - 1 .
7430
7431 @findex EMIT_MODE_SET
7432 @item EMIT_MODE_SET (@var{entity}, @var{mode}, @var{hard_regs_live})
7433 Generate one or more insns to set @var{entity} to @var{mode}.
7434 @var{hard_reg_live} is the set of hard registers live at the point where
7435 the insn(s) are to be inserted.
7436 @end table
7437
7438 @node Misc
7439 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7440 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7441
7442 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7443 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7444
7445 @table @code
7446 @item PREDICATE_CODES
7447 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
7448 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7449 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7450 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7451 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7452 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7453 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7454 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7455
7456 @smallexample
7457 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
7458 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7459 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7460 @end smallexample
7461
7462 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7463 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7464 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7465 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7466 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
7467 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
7468 patterns.
7469
7470 @item SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7471 @findex SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7472 Define this if you have special predicates that know special things
7473 about modes. Genrecog will warn about certain forms of
7474 @code{match_operand} without a mode; if the operand predicate is
7475 listed in @code{SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES}, the warning will be
7476 suppressed.
7477
7478 Here is an example from the IA-32 port (@code{ext_register_operand}
7479 specially checks for @code{HImode} or @code{SImode} in preparation
7480 for a byte extraction from @code{%ah} etc.).
7481
7482 @smallexample
7483 #define SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES \
7484 "ext_register_operand",
7485 @end smallexample
7486
7487 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7488 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7489 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7490 elements of a jump-table should have.
7491
7492 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7493 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7494 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7495 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7496 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7497 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7498 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7499 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7500 flags can be updated.
7501
7502 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7503 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7504 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7505 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7506 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
7507
7508 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7509 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7510 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7511 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7512 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7513
7514 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7515 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7516 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7517 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7518 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7519 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7520
7521 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7522 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7523 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7524 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7525 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7526
7527 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7528 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7529 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7530 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7531 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7532 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7533 of @var{mode} for which the
7534 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7535 @code{NIL} for other modes.
7536
7537 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7538 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7539 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7540 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7541 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7542
7543 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7544 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7545 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7546 extends.
7547
7548 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7549 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7550 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7551 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7552 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7553
7554 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7555 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7556 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7557 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7558 unsigned one.
7559
7560 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7561 @item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7562 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7563 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7564 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7565 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7566 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7567 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7568 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7569
7570 @findex MOVE_MAX
7571 @item MOVE_MAX
7572 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7573 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7574
7575 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7576 @item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7577 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7578 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7579 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7580 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7581 at run-time.
7582
7583 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7584 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7585 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7586 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7587 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7588 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7589 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7590 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7591 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7592 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7593 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7594 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7595
7596 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7597 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7598 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7599
7600 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7601 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7602 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7603 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7604 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7605
7606 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7607
7608 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7609 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7610 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7611 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7612 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7613 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7614
7615 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7616
7617 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7618 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7619 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7620 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7621 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7622 such cases may improve things.
7623
7624 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7625 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7626 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7627 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7628 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7629 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7630 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7631
7632 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7633 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7634 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7635 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7636 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7637 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7638 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7639 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7640 the compiler.
7641
7642 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7643 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7644 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7645 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7646 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7647 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7648 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7649 expression
7650
7651 @smallexample
7652 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7653 @end smallexample
7654
7655 @noindent
7656 can be converted to
7657
7658 @smallexample
7659 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7660 @end smallexample
7661
7662 @noindent
7663 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7664 tested into the sign bit.
7665
7666 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7667 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7668 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7669 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7670 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7671 comparison operators and let us know
7672 @ifset USING
7673 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7674 @end ifset
7675 @ifclear USING
7676 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7677 @end ifclear
7678
7679 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7680 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7681 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7682 to be used:
7683
7684 @itemize @bullet
7685 @item
7686 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7687 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7688 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7689 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7690 combine the normalization with other operations.
7691
7692 @item
7693 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7694 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7695 other machines.
7696
7697 @item
7698 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7699 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7700 others.
7701
7702 @item
7703 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7704 @end itemize
7705
7706 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7707 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7708 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7709 those cases, e.g., one matching
7710
7711 @smallexample
7712 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7713 @end smallexample
7714
7715 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7716 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7717 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7718 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7719 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7720 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7721 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7722 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7723
7724 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7725 instructions.
7726
7727 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7728 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7729 A C expression that gives a non-zero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7730 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7731 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7732 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7733 this macro.
7734
7735 @findex Pmode
7736 @item Pmode
7737 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7738 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7739 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7740 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7741 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7742
7743 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7744 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7745 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7746 to @code{Pmode}.
7747
7748 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7749 @item FUNCTION_MODE
7750 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7751 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7752 should be @code{QImode}.
7753
7754 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7755 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7756 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7757 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7758 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7759
7760 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7761 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7762 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7763
7764 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7765 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7766 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7767 and print no error message.
7768
7769 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7770 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7771 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7772 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7773 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7774 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7775
7776 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7777 @findex #pragma
7778 @findex pragma
7779 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{name})
7780 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7781 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
7782 macro, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
7783 @samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7784 stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7785 a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7786 into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7787 #pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7788 just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7789 undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
7790 pointing at the next character after the end of the pragma. Any
7791 characters remaining on the line will be ignored.
7792
7793 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7794 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7795 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7796 programs which already use it.
7797
7798 If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7799 @samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7800
7801 Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7802 and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7803 when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7804
7805 @findex HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7806 @findex #pragma
7807 @findex pragma
7808 @item HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7809 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want the System V style
7810 pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(<n>)} and @samp{#pragma weak <name>
7811 [=<value>]} to be supported by gcc.
7812
7813 The pack pragma specifies the maximum alignment (in bytes) of fields
7814 within a structure, in much the same way as the @samp{__aligned__} and
7815 @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A pack value of zero resets
7816 the behaviour to the default.
7817
7818 The weak pragma only works if @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} and
7819 @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} are defined. If enabled it allows the creation
7820 of specifically named weak labels, optionally with a value.
7821
7822 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7823 @findex #pragma
7824 @findex pragma
7825 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7826 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want to support the Win32
7827 style pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(push,<n>)} and @samp{#pragma
7828 pack(pop)}. The pack(push,<n>) pragma specifies the maximum alignment
7829 (in bytes) of fields within a structure, in much the same way as the
7830 @samp{__aligned__} and @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A
7831 pack value of zero resets the behaviour to the default. Successive
7832 invocations of this pragma cause the previous values to be stacked, so
7833 that invocations of @samp{#pragma pack(pop)} will return to the previous
7834 value.
7835
7836 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7837 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7838 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7839 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7840 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7841
7842 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7843 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7844 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7845 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7846 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7847
7848 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7849 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7850 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7851 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7852 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7853 generated).
7854
7855 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7856 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7857 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7858 newly defined @var{type}.
7859
7860 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7861 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7862 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7863 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7864 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7865 called and returned 1.
7866
7867 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7868 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7869 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7870 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7871 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7872 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7873 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7874 definition.
7875
7876 @findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7877 @item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7878 Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7879 when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7880 wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7881 the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7882 created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7883 for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7884 attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7885 declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7886
7887 @findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7888 @item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7889 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7890 newly defined @var{decl}.
7891
7892 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7893 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7894 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7895 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7896 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7897 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7898
7899 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7900 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7901 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7902 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7903 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7904 @samp{.} is used instead.
7905
7906 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7907 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7908 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7909 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7910 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7911 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7912
7913 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7914 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7915 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7916 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7917 value is explicitly returned).
7918
7919 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7920 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7921 @code{main}.
7922
7923 @item NEED_ATEXIT
7924 @findex NEED_ATEXIT
7925 Define this if the target system lacks the function @code{atexit}
7926 from the ANSI C standard. If this macro is defined, a default definition
7927 will be provided to support C++. If @code{ON_EXIT} is not defined,
7928 a default @code{exit} function will also be provided.
7929
7930 @item ON_EXIT
7931 @findex ON_EXIT
7932 Define this macro if the target has another way to implement atexit
7933 functionality without replacing @code{exit}. For instance, SunOS 4 has
7934 a similar @code{on_exit} library function.
7935
7936 The definition should be a functional macro which can be used just like
7937 the @code{atexit} function.
7938
7939 @item EXIT_BODY
7940 @findex EXIT_BODY
7941 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7942 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7943 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7944 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7945 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7946
7947 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7948 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7949 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7950 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7951 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7952 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7953 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7954 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7955 you should define this macro.
7956
7957 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7958
7959 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7960 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7961 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7962 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7963 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7964 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7965 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7966 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7967 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7968 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7969 slot of @var{insn}.
7970
7971 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7972
7973 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7974 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7975 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7976 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7977 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7978 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7979
7980 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7981 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7982 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7983 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7984 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7985 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7986
7987 @findex MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7988 @item MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7989 A C statement that adds to @var{CLOBBERS} @code{STRING_CST} trees for
7990 any hard regs the port wishes to automatically clobber for all asms.
7991
7992 @findex ISSUE_RATE
7993 @item ISSUE_RATE
7994 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7995 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine.
7996
7997 @findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7998 @item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose})
7999 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler at the
8000 beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
8001 @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
8002 debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
8003 @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
8004
8005 @findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
8006 @item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready}, @var{clock}, @var{can_issue_more})
8007 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
8008 has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
8009 it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
8010 @samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
8011 stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
8012 provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
8013 the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
8014 @var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
8015 scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
8016 @var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0]. @var{clock}
8017 is the timer tick of the scheduler. @var{can_issue_more} is an output
8018 parameter that is set to the number of insns that can issue this clock;
8019 normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.
8020
8021 @findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
8022 @item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
8023 A C statement which is executed by the scheduler after it
8024 has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
8025 pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
8026 is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
8027 @var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
8028 number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
8029 @samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
8030 value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
8031
8032 @findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
8033 @item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
8034 Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
8035 operations other than load, store and copy operations.
8036
8037 You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
8038 @code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
8039 this macro.
8040
8041 @findex MATH_LIBRARY
8042 @item MATH_LIBRARY
8043 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
8044 in the system math library, or @samp{""} if the target does not have a
8045 separate math library.
8046
8047 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"-lm"} is wrong.
8048
8049 @findex LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
8050 @item LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
8051 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
8052 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
8053
8054 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
8055 is wrong.
8056
8057 @findex TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
8058 @item TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW
8059 Define this macro if the target supports file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW.
8060 Note that this functionality is part of POSIX.
8061 Defining @code{TARGET_HAS_F_SETLKW} will enable the test coverage code
8062 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
8063 if the program has forked.
8064
8065 @findex MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8066 @item MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8067
8068 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
8069 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
8070 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
8071 1 if it does use cc0.
8072
8073 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS
8074 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS
8075 A C expression to modify the tests in @code{TRUE_EXPR}, and
8076 @code{FALSE_EXPPR} for use in converting insns in @code{TEST_BB},
8077 @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB} basic blocks to
8078 conditional execution. Set either @code{TRUE_EXPR} or @code{FALSE_EXPR}
8079 to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
8080
8081 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN
8082 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN
8083 A C expression to modify the @code{PATTERN} of an @code{INSN} that is to
8084 be converted to conditional execution format.
8085
8086 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL
8087 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL
8088 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
8089 converting code to conditional execution in the basic blocks
8090 @code{TEST_BB}, @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB}.
8091
8092 @findex IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL
8093 @item IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL
8094 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
8095 converting code to conditional execution in the basic blocks
8096 @code{TEST_BB}, @code{THEN_BB}, @code{ELSE_BB}, and @code{JOIN_BB}.
8097 @end table